JP2018130559A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suitably perform reservation display.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: continuous performance execution means for executing variable display on the basis of a decision result of decision means for deciding whether or not to control the game machine to an advantageous state, determining whether or not to control the game machine to the advantageous state before a decision by the decision means, bringing a display form of reservation display corresponding to the variable display being an object of the determination to a special form on the basis of the determination, and capable of executing a continuous performance in the variable display in a plurality of times; and suggestion performance execution means for executing a suggestion performance for suggesting that the display form of the reservation display is changed. When the display form of the reservation display is the special form, the continuous performance execution means executes the continuous performance at a high ratio higher than that in the case that the display form of the reservation display is not the special form, and when there is reservation display which is displayed in a display form different from a normal form out of the reservation display, the suggestion performance execution means executes the suggestion performance at a high ratio by comparing it with that in the case that there is no reservation display which is displayed in the display form different from the normal form.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 82

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Are configured to give the player.

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. When it is made, “big hit (specific game state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, predetermined information (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number) regarding variable display that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed through the start area (for example, the start winning opening). ) As a hold memory, and a hold display is displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, a hold storage display unit) corresponding to each hold storage.

  In such gaming machines, there is one configured to display a specific hold display that displays an operation at a predetermined cycle as the hold display. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a black circle is arranged at the periphery of a round display, and that the black circle rotates in a predetermined direction at a slow speed or a fast speed so as to display a specific hold display. .

JP 2012-254201 A (paragraph 0395, FIG. 42)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement with respect to the hold display.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a hold display.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and provides information regarding the variable display. Determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state; and a hold display control means for displaying a hold display corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold storage means; Determining means, variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the determination result of the determining means, and determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determining means; Based on the determination by the determination unit, the display mode control unit that makes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the determination a special mode, and the continuous display in a plurality of variable displays A continuous production execution means that can execute the output, and a suggestion production execution means that executes a suggestion production that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the case of the special mode, the continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the display mode of the hold display is not the special mode, and the suggestion effect executing means is a display mode different from the normal mode in the hold display. When there is a hold display displayed by the above, a suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when there is no hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. According to such a configuration, the hold display can be suitably performed.

(Means 2) The gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display (for example, based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a start area (for example, the first start winning port 13, the second start winning port 14). A game machine capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous for a player, performing a variation display of the first special symbol, a variation display of the second special symbol, a variation display of the production symbol), Information related to variable display is stored in hold storage means (eg, first hold storage buffer, second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold information (eg, first hold storage, second hold storage), and hold storage means. Hold display control means for displaying a hold display corresponding to each of the held hold information (for example, steps S1010 (FIG. 40) and S1023 (FIG. 41) in the production control microcomputer 100) S1033 (FIG. 41), S1043 (FIG. 44), S1047 (FIG. 44), S1060 (FIG. 46), S1020 (FIG. 69), S1023A (FIG. 70), S1033A (FIG. 70) and advantageous state) Deciding means for deciding whether or not to control (for example, whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the big hit determination random number in the game control microcomputer 560 (CPU 56) when the variable symbol display is started) And a variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, effect symbol variation start processing (FIGS. 55 and 72) in the effect control microcomputer 100). A determination unit (e.g., an idle portion) and a determination unit (e.g., play Based on the determination of the control microcomputer 560 in steps S220 to S222 (FIG. 22) and the determination by the determination means, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the determination is special. Display mode control means (for example, steps S1023 (FIG. 41) and S1043 (FIG. 44) in the production control microcomputer 100) which are modes (for example, “heat” character of the first special mode or flame effect of the second special mode). ), A portion for executing S1023A (FIG. 70), and continuous effect execution means capable of executing a continuous effect in a plurality of variable displays (for example, background change effect determination processing (FIG. 46) in the effect control microcomputer 100). Steps S1055, S1056, S1058, and Step S1059, and Steps S2041 and S2043 of the process table selection process (FIG. 58), step S2026 of the change start time determination process (FIG. 73), and a part for executing steps S2063 and S2065 of the process table selection process (FIG. 76)) A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the display changes, and the continuous effect execution means has a display mode of the hold display when the display mode of the hold display is a special mode. A continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of a non-special aspect (for example, referring to the background change effect determination table of FIG. 47 in the effect control microcomputer 100, step S1050 of the background change effect determination process (FIG. 46)). 75 of the variation start time determination process with reference to the second variation start time determination table. The portion of the screen S2024 (FIG. 73) is executed), the hold display control means executes a specific effect (for example, an appearance effect) associated with the display of the hold display after the game medium passes through the start area, and displays the hold. Can be operated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), and when a new hold display is displayed based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, it is already displayed from the execution of the specific effect. The operation of the hold display that has been performed and the operation of the hold display that is newly displayed are synchronized (for example, a portion that executes steps S6012 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the suggested effect execution means is When there is a hold display that is displayed in a different display mode from the normal mode, the display mode is different from the normal mode. Compared with the case where there is no hold display shown, and executes the suggestion effect by a high percentage. According to such a configuration, since the operation of the hold display is synchronized, the appearance of the hold display can be ensured when the hold display is configured to be operable. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is a special mode, the continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the display mode of the hold display is not a special mode. Both of the aspects can suitably increase the player's expectation.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation | variation corresponding | compatible display area in a display image, the 1st reserved memory number display part, and the 2nd reserved memory number display part. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the special aspect display of a holding | maintenance change effect, and the special aspect display of a background change effect. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning time determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a determination table at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect flag table. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding change effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a background change effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a background change effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is explanatory drawing which showed the relationship between a game state (mode), the mode of a hold display, the presence or absence of an appearance effect, and the synchronous timing of the operation display of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a process table selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a mode extension determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a specific hold display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display aspect of an appearance effect and a specific hold display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display aspect of an appearance effect and a specific hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning time determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start time determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st fluctuation | variation start time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd variation start time determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process table selection process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect determination process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect execution determination table and final display mode determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect change timing determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect mode determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 1st prefetch effect pattern in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 2nd prefetch effect pattern in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prefetch effect based on the 2nd prefetch effect pattern in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area | region at the time of a start winning prize in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special effect in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormality alerting | reporting control process in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows examples, such as an effect image in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows examples, such as an effect image in 5th Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the outlier) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d is assimilated with the background image when the display is turned off. In order to prevent the image from becoming invisible, it is desirable that the display color be different from the background image (for example, black).

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls is paid out to the player. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player may be different depending on whether the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or when the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14. . For example, one game ball may be paid out to the player when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13. As described above, when the number of prize balls is reduced with respect to one win, the game ball can be configured to easily win the first start winning opening 13 instead. That is, the player can enjoy the game because the number of prize balls to be paid out by one winning is reduced, but the first special symbol is easily displayed in a variable manner. However, in this case, the expected value for winning a prize ball in the reeds is less than a predetermined value (for example, 6400 pieces), and the jackpot probability that the display result of variable symbol special display is a big hit is a predetermined value (for example, , Less than 1/260). In addition, during the consecutive games, for example, a period from when the big hit game is started until it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, until the probability change state controlled after the big hit game is started (after the big hit game is finished) ( The period until the control of the short-time state or the normal state is started), or the period from the start of the big hit game until the end of the probability change state or the short-time state controlled after the big hit game (the control of the normal state is started) (Until). The big hit probability being less than a predetermined value (for example, 1/260) means that the percentage of big hits is higher than when the big hit probability is a predetermined value (for example, a ratio of 1/100). Is a big hit).

  Further, even when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, one prize ball may be paid out to the player. However, in this case as well, it is desirable to appropriately adjust the winning probability of winning a prize ball in the retreat and the jackpot probability that the display result of the variable symbol special display is a big hit.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first reserved memory display unit 9a for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 9b for displaying the second reserved memory number are provided. Yes. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a 1st hold | maintenance memory and a 2nd hold | maintenance memory are displayed side by side in order of winning to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14, in the total holding storage display part, So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  Further, a variation corresponding display area 180 is provided at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The variation corresponding display area 180 corresponds to the variation display to be executed when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The fluctuation correspondence display is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a normal mode in which no characters or effects are applied, or a specific display mode in which characters or effects are applied). In other words, the variation correspondence display suggests that the variation display is being executed.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 78 may be operated in a pseudo-series effect, for example, not limited to the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect. In this embodiment, when the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect is executed, the light emission control of the light guide plate is performed in addition to the movement of the movable member 78 as described later.

  Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. The effect blade roles 79a and 79b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. In addition, not only the effect blade role notice effect but also the effect blade role 79a, 79b may be operated in a pseudo-ream effect or a super reach effect, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is higher (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of displaying a special symbol is higher than that in the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change big hit (in this example, 15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit), after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a so-called probability change state, and the gaming state is changed to a high probability state. A high base that is a gaming state controlled so that the game ball is easily started and won (ie, the execution condition of variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). Transition to the state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 53 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 53 includes a selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and an upper limit selection setting function) for numerical data update range, a selection setting function for numeric data update rules, and selection of numeric data update rules. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 produces a display result designation command designating a display result (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit, 15R positive change big hit, 5R positive change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or out) stored in the backup RAM. It transmits with respect to the control board 80 (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 53 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 53 to update the random R value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21) ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is won, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured such that the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits may not be provided. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you make a small hit, it will only shift to the probable change state (high probability state) and suddenly probable big hits without the short time state (high base state). Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit, 15R positive variable big hit, 5R positive variable big hit, sudden positive variable big hit which will be described later)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream or slip effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but involves a pseudo-ream or slip effect. Includes non-reach CA2-2, which is a variation pattern type including, non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slip production, and a variation pattern that includes only normal reach Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type that includes, and a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit, 5R positive variable big hit, sudden probability variable big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination table is “15 round (15R) normal jackpot” based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , "5 round (5R) normal jackpot", "15 round (15R) probability variation jackpot", "5 round (5R) probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" is referred to to determine It is a table. In the following description, “15R normal big hit” and “5R normal big hit” may be referred to as “normal big hit”, and “15R positive change big hit” and “5R positive change big hit” and “sudden probability change big hit” are “probable big hit”. May be called. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, five determination values are assigned to “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). In the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol), one judgment value for “suddenly probable big hit” is determined. Is assigned (determined as a sudden probability variation jackpot at a ratio of 1/40). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table (that is, the first special symbol big hit type determination table is assigned). Only when the variation display of one special symbol is performed, it may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the big hit types are “15 rounds (15R) normal big hit”, “5 rounds (5R) normal big hit”, “15 rounds (15R) There are “probable big hits”, “5-round (5R) probable big hits”, and “suddenly probable big hits”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 5 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. It is not restricted to what was shown with the form of. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 10-round jackpot game or a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 7-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, the big hit types are “15 round (15R) normal big hit”, “5 round (5R) normal big hit”, “15 round (15R) positive chance big hit”, and “5 round (5R) positive big hit”. However, it is not limited to five types, but, for example, six or more types of big hits may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than five types, for example, only four types, three types, or two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15 round (15R) normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot gaming state and transitions to a low probability / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Then, after the transition to the low probability / high base state, when the special symbol variation display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the low probability / high base state is finished and the low probability / low base state is obtained. . Note that the low probability / high base state is also ended when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  “5 round (5R) normal big hit” is a normal big hit with a different number of rounds than “15R normal big hit”, and it is controlled to a big round gaming state of 5 rounds, and the low probability / high after the big hit gaming state ends It is a big hit to shift to the base state. Then, after the transition to the low probability / high base state, when the special symbol variation display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the low probability / high base state is finished and the low probability / low base state is obtained. . Note that the low probability / high base state is also ended when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  The “15 round (15R) probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds and is shifted to the high probability / high base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  “5 rounds (5R) probable big hit” is a probable big hit with a different number of rounds than “15R probable big hit”, which is controlled to a five round big hit gaming state and has a high probability / high after the big hit gaming state ends. It is a big hit to shift to the base state. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times the winning a prize opening is open compared to other big hits (“15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R positive big hit”, and “5R positive big hit”). This is a jackpot that is allowed up to a small number of times (in this embodiment, two 0.1 second releases). In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability big hit” and “5R probability big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, In the “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game. In this embodiment, the high probability / high base state is entered after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state. The high probability / high base state continues until the next big hit occurs.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player during the period in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Specifically, the number of game media that can be acquired by the player is larger in the case of 15R normal big hit and 15R probability big hit than in the case of 5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit and sudden probability big hit. That is, it can be said that the 15R big hit (15R probability variable big hit and 15R normal big hit) is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the big hit of 5R or less (5R normal big hit, 5R positive variable big hit, and sudden probability variable big hit) in the big hit gaming state. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player after the jackpot gaming state ends. Specifically, 15R probability change big hit and 5R probability change big hit and sudden probability change big hit are compared to 15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit, and are controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state, thereby generating the next big hit. It's easy to do. That is, it can be said that the probability change big hit (15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit and sudden probability change big hit) is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the normal big hit (15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit) after the big hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the 5R big hit (5R positive variation big hit and 5R normal big hit) and the 15R big hit (15R positive variation big hit and 15R normal big hit) have the same opening time of the big winning opening per round. An example is shown in which the number of times the winning opening is opened is not limited to this type, but there are a plurality of jackpot types that share the same number of times the opening of the big winning opening but have different opening times of the big winning opening. May be. For example, the number of times of opening the grand prize opening is 15 times, of which 5 times are the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening is 29 seconds and the remaining 10 times are the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening is 0.1 seconds. There may be a jackpot type (so-called real five-round jackpot) and a jackpot type (so-called real 15-round jackpot) having a maximum winning opening time of 29 seconds for all 15 times. In such a case, it can be said that the latter (substantial 15 rounds jackpot) is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the former (substantial 5 rounds jackpot) in the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. As described above, the advantage in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state is not determined only by the number of times the big winning opening is opened, but is based on the period during which the game ball can win the big winning opening.

  The jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8D used when the first special symbol is displayed is a numerical value to be compared with a random value of “15R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variable jackpot”. ”,“ 5R probability variation big hit ”, and“ sudden probability variation big hit ”, respectively, are set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  The jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8E used when the second special symbol is displayed is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, which is “5R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”. ”,“ 5R probability variation big hit ”, and“ sudden probability variation big hit ”, respectively, are set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the determination value is set so that the big hit type is not determined to be the 5R normal big hit, but it is not limited to such a form. The determination value may be set so that the big hit type may be determined as a 5R normal big hit when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the determination value is set so that the big hit type is not determined to be the 15R normal big hit. Instead, the determination value may be set so that the big hit type may be determined as 15R normal big hit when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit)”, and the big hit type is “probable big hit (15R probability big change”). With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B used in the case of “big hit, 5R probability variation big hit)”, the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 are used. The judgment value assignment is different.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, with respect to the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the normal big hit or the big hit state with the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the game state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state and the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> C are used for the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more are shown. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is used in which the variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation / shortening time is used regardless of the total number of stored storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and sliding effects, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns that do not involve the pseudo ream and the slide effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes the pseudo ream and the slide effect. Special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A005 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command to a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of “15R normal big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “5R normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)). ) Is used, the big hit start 3 designation command (A003 (H)) is used when it is “15R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit start 4 designation command (A004 (H)) when it is “5R probability variation big hit”. ) Is used, and in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (A005 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R normal big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by “5R normal jackpot”. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 3 designation command: an ending 3 designation command). The big hit end 3 designation command (A303 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end 4 designation command: ending 4 designation command). The big hit end 4 designation command (A304 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “5R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 5 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time reduction state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following types of reserved memory Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won as the hold storage information (whether the first hold storage or the second hold storage has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “5R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “5R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (design 5 designating command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 7 designation command) in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to (D) and FIG. 10 (C). A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, a short time state, or out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit)” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the value is 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a “probable variation big hit (15R certain variation big hit, 5R certain variation big hit)” at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines a random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not the value is 1 to 38. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started. There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the change pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, a hold notice effect, which will be described later, is executed for the change display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “holding notice effect” is a kind of so-called pre-reading notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, and includes the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory. This is a notice effect performed by displaying the hold display on the display unit 9b in a display mode different from the normal display mode. In this embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed at the timing when an appearance effect and a hold display, which will be described later, are displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be notified. It should be noted that the display of the hold display is once started in the normal display mode at the timing when the appearance effect and the hold display to be described later are displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning with respect to the variable display to be notified, and thereafter the predetermined display ( For example, the hold notice effect may be executed by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal display mode at the hold shift timing).

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the short time state (high base state), or when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is made during the big hit game. Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), a winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted, and the fluctuations shown in FIGS. A category command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 31), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time-short flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-short state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize presentation effect process is executed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are preliminarily determined at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set with a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). Note that in the process of step S1214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing in steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start winning prize is received in the second start winning opening 14 and the winning time effect processing in step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be performed. That is, only when it is in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 8A. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A hold notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach will be executed during the change display of effect symbols by 100.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. There is a case where the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit) or sudden probability variation big hit is suddenly changed from the normal state to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability variation flag or a time reduction flag is set). Determine. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning, until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the state is the short time state and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit) or sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, there is a case where the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, since the range of determination values is shared with respect to at least the variation pattern type that becomes “super-reaching”, it is determined whether or not “super-reaching” is detected. be able to.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “06 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability variable big hit”, “5R probability variable big hit”, or “sudden probability variable big hit”. If there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R positive probability big hit”, “5R positive probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “5R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “5R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “5R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines “normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit)”, the threshold values 74 and 149 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “probable variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit)”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . Then, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not show which variation pattern type is specifically shown, but the variation shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a hold notice effect described later may be executed.

(Display of the fluctuation corresponding display area 180, the first reserved memory number display unit 9a and the second reserved memory number display unit 9b)
FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the change-corresponding display area 180, the first reserved memory number display unit 9a, and the second reserved memory number display unit 9b provided in the lower part of the effect display device 9. These variation-corresponding display areas 180, the first reserved memory number display part 9a and the second reserved memory number display part 9b are located below the effect symbol display area where the effect symbols (in this example, “777”) are displayed. This is an area in which a variation correspondence display or a hold display, which is a circular object corresponding to each variation display that is being executed or has been determined to be executed, is displayed. Here, in the variation corresponding display area 180 located at the lower left end of the effect display device 9, a variation corresponding display corresponding to the currently performed variation display (variable display satisfying the start condition) is displayed. Moreover, it is executed on the first reserved memory number display unit 9a and the second reserved memory number display unit 9b that are located on the right side of the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 when viewed from the player side below the effect display device 9. The hold display corresponding to the variable display that has been determined but not yet executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) is displayed.

  The first reserved memory number display section 9a and the second reserved memory number display section 9b are arranged in order from the right side of the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 toward the right edge of the screen, the hold display areas 181A, 181B, 181C, 181D, 181E, 181F, 181G. , And 181H, of which the hold display areas 181A to 181D constitute the first hold memory number display section 9a, and the hold display areas 181E to 181H constitute the second hold memory number display section 9b.

  When the variable display start condition corresponding to the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 9a or the second hold memory number display unit 9b is satisfied, the first hold memory number display unit 9a or the second hold The object displayed as the hold display on the memory number display portion 9b is shifted to the variation corresponding display area 180 and displayed as the variation corresponding display. At this time, the display mode of the object shifted to the variation corresponding display area 180 is maintained. That is, if the display mode of the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 9a or the second hold memory number display unit 9b is a special mode, the hold display is shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 and changed. Even if it is displayed as a correspondence display, the display mode of the variation correspondence display is a special mode.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is determined in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, in step S220) Only the processing may be executed, and the processing in steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are changed A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation jackpot”, “5R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”, and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“15R normal jackpot”, “15R normal jackpot”, “ "5R normal big hit", "15R probability change big hit", "5R probability change big hit" or "sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “5R normal jackpot”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “5R positive variable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “05” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly probable big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “5R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “15R probable big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R normal big hit” is decided, “2” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. When “5R normal big hit” is determined, “4” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, a time-short flag is set when shifting to the time-saving state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit), and the probability change big hit (15R positive change big hit, 5R positive change). At the end of the big hit game based on the big hit), the shift to the probability change state and the short time state are also set, so that the short time flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined as Y in step S95, the control is performed in the time-saving state together with the probability change state after the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit in addition to the case where the control is only in the time-saving state after the big hit game based on the normal big hit game. There are times when it has been.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state, a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of a shortened change may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (see FIG. 10). 10 (B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to configure so as to perform a hold notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 13) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 7 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S120. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R normal big hit” is specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the type of jackpot is “5R normal jackpot”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Specifically, whether or not it is “5R normal big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “5R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (steps S117 and S118). Specifically, whether or not it is “5R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “04”. it can. When neither of “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability variable big hit” or “5R probability big hit” (that is, when “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 designates the display result 6 Control to transmit a command is performed (step S119).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S120). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 7 designation command (step S121). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S120), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S122).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S123).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122, which will be described later, for example. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is “5R normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start 3 designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is “5R probability variable big hit”, a big hit start 4 designation command (command A004 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A005 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability variable big hit”, “5R positive variable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit” is the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 Is determined based on data indicating the data (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening the winning prize opening number counter (for example, “15R normal big hit” or “15R probability big hit” is 15 times, and “5R normal big hit” or “5R probability big hit” is 5 times. In the case of “suddenly probable big hit”, 2) is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit, 15R positive change big hit, 5R positive change big hit, the round time is 29 seconds. Set. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A005 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is “15R normal big hit”, a big hit end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “5R normal big hit”, a big hit end 2 designation command (command A302 ( H)) is transmitted, and if it is “15R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end 3 designation command (command A303 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is “5R probability variation big hit”, it is a big hit end 4 designation command. (Command A304 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is "sudden probability sudden change big hit", a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A305 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is based on a normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit) (step S165). S166). Whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended, specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” or “02”. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is not finished (that is, if the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit) or sudden probability variation big hit is finished), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag. The game state is set to shift to the probability change state (step S169), and the time reduction flag is set to change the game state to the time reduction state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  In this embodiment, since the above processing is executed, when it is controlled to the probability variation state, it is also controlled to the time reduction state, so that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state) ), Short-time state (low probability / high base state), and probability variation state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  34 to 36 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A004 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 3 designation command is received, the jackpot start 3 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 4 designation command is received, the jackpot start 4 designation command reception flag is set. .

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A005 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A304 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when a jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag is set. When a jackpot end 2 designation command is received, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot end 3 designation command is received, the jackpot end 3 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot end 4 designation command is received, the jackpot end 4 designation command reception flag is set. .

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A305 (H)) (step S627), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S651). S652).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S653). S654).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 has the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. The first start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in an empty first storage area (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 has the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. Then, the second start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in a free first storage area (step S660).

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize. Among these, FIG. 37A shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 37B shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 37A, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the first start winning command storage area. Yes. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. 20, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is shown. When there is a start winning at the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number) within one timer interruption Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize command storage area and the second start prize command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. When a command and a variable category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variable category command storage area, respectively. When the pending storage number addition designation command is received, if the first pending storage number addition designation command is received, it is understood that the first pending storage number is incremented by one. If the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the first stored memory number addition designation command is received together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and the variable category command. When the first reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning command storage area and the second reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the second reserved memory is stored together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the second start winning command storage area (in FIG. 37, the first start winning command is stored). An example is shown in which commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the pay area, and commands are stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Have been).

  It should be noted that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 37 is sequentially displayed in steps S664 and S668, which will be described later, at the timing when the variation display of the effect symbol is started each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 37B are first deleted. . Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so that the first timing shown in FIG. The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first starting winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is deleted. The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command, which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning effect processing at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 22), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S662). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one first on-hold display in the first on-hold storage display unit 9a, shifts the remaining first on-hold display after the erased first on-hold storage one by one, The first reserved memory number display in the one reserved memory display unit 9a is updated (step S663). For example, when the 1st to 3rd 1st hold display of the 1st hold memory display part 9a is lit-up display, when the 1st hold memory number subtraction designation command is received, the 1st 1st hold display While erasing the first hold display, the first hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed in the third is displayed in the second display area. Shift to. Next, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the command at the time of start winning (the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation) stored in the first storage area of the first start prize winning command storage area. Command) is deleted, and the contents of the first start winning prize command storage area are shifted (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S665), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S666). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one second on-hold display in the second on-hold storage display portion 9b, shifts the remaining second on-hold display after the erased second on-hold storage one by one, The second reserved memory number display in the two reserved memory display section 9a is updated (step S667). For example, when the first to third first hold displays of the second hold storage display section 9b are lit up, the first hold display subtraction designation command is received when the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. While erasing the second hold display, the second hold display that was displayed second is shifted to the first display area, and the second hold display that was displayed third is the second display area Shift to. Next, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the command at the time of the start winning (the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation) stored in the first storage area of the second start prize winning command storage area. Command) is deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of the second start winning prize are shifted (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 uses a background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the normal state) is displayed by displaying the background screen corresponding to the normal state. (Also referred to as a normal performance mode). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating the probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating the time reduction state (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a background screen of a green background color). (Step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the short time state) is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short time state. (Also referred to as a time reduction effect mode). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S674).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S675), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, a background screen with a red background color). (Step S676). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the probability variation state) is displayed by displaying a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state. (Also referred to as a probability variation effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S677).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S678). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S800A). If neither the probability change state flag nor the short time state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a hold change effect and a background change effect, which will be described later, as a prefetch effect, And an effect mode when executing the hold change effect and the background change effect (the display mode of the hold display is set to either the first special mode or the second special mode, or the background image of the design pattern is set to the first special mode or the second special mode. Pre-reading effect determination processing for determining which of the two special modes is to be performed (step S800B). If the certain change state flag or the short time state flag is set (that is, if the certain change state or the short time state), the presentation control CPU 101 executes a hold display control process for performing display control of the hold display (step S800C). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating specific examples of the special mode display of the hold change effect and the special mode display of the background change effect.

  “Hold change effect” is a display mode of the hold display displayed on the first hold memory number display unit 9a and the second hold memory number display unit 9b in a special mode different from the normal mode under a predetermined condition. Production. In this embodiment, the special mode includes the first special mode (also referred to as “heat” character ”) shown in FIG. 39 (a-1) and the second special mode (“ There are two types of flame effects. As shown in FIG. 39 (a-1), the “hot” character in the first special mode is a display mode in which the “hot” character is applied to the hold display. As shown in FIG. 39 (a-2), the flame effect of the second special mode is a display mode in which a flame image effect is applied to the hold display.

  The “background change effect” is an effect of displaying the display mode of the background image of the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 in a special mode different from the normal mode under a predetermined condition. In this embodiment, the special mode is the first special mode (also referred to as “sunny sky mode”) shown in FIG. 39 (b-1) and the second special mode (“lightning strike” shown in FIG. 39 (b-2). There are two types of modes. As shown in FIG. 39 (b-1), the fine weather mode of the first special mode is a mode for displaying a background image indicating the fine weather with the sun coming out. As shown in FIG. 39 (b-2), the lightning strike mode of the second special mode is a mode for displaying a background image indicating the weather in which a lightning strike has occurred from a thundercloud.

  The process in which these hold change effects and background change effects are executed will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing prefetch effect determination processing (step S800B). In the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first has a set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or It is confirmed whether or not a second set of second reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received (step S1001). Specifically, a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) are stored in the command storage area at the time of winning a prize. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command for starting a winning prize is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts effect random numbers (step S1002). The random number for the effect extracted here is whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the background change effect in the winning determination process, the hold change effect determination process, and the background change effect determination process, which will be described later. Used to determine the mode of the hold change effect and the background change effect. Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 43 to be described later), and checks whether both the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set (step S1003). The hold change effect flag is set based on the decision to execute the hold change effect in the winning determination process or the hold change effect determination process described later. Further, the background change effect flag is set based on the decision to execute the background change effect in the winning determination process or the background change effect determination process described later. That is, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not both the hold change effect and the background change effect are determined to be executed. In this embodiment, the case where YES is determined in step S1003 is the case where both the hold change effect and the background change effect have already been executed, or the hold change effect has already been executed and the background change effect has not yet been executed. One of the cases where it has not been executed but has been decided to be executed. When both the on-hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1003), the effect control CPU 101 newly generates a command corresponding to the newly received start winning prize command. A process for displaying a reserved display in a normal mode that is not a special mode (for example, a round display mode in which neither characters nor image effects are applied) is executed (step S1010).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 43 to be described later), and checks whether neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set (step S1004). When neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table, that is, when neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set (Y in step S1004), The effect control CPU 101 executes a winning determination process (step S1005), which will be described later. If either the pending change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (N in step S1004), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether only the background change effect flag is set. (Step S1006). When only the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 executes a hold change effect determination process (step S1007) described later. When the background change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S1006), it is determined that only the pending change effect flag is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the number of reserved memories (step S1008). In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if the gaming state is the low base state (normal state in this example), the first reserved memory number The number is confirmed, and if the gaming state is a high base state (in this example, the probability variation state or the short time state), the number of the second pending storage number is confirmed. When the number of reserved memories is less than 3 (N in step S1008), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new reserved display corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning a normal mode that is not a special mode. In step S1010, the process of displaying is performed. When the number of reserved memories is 3 or more (Y in step S1008), the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect determining process (step S1009) described later.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S1006 to check whether only the background change effect flag is set, at least one of the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag is displayed in the effect flag table. Is not set, and it has already been confirmed that either the pending change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set (step S1003 and step S1004). If it can be confirmed that it is set, it can be determined that only the background change effect flag is set at that time.

(Winning determination process (step S1005), FIG. 41)
As described above, when the effect control CPU 101 confirms that neither the hold change effect flag nor the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1004), the winning determination process (step S1005) is performed. Run. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the winning determination process (step S1005).

  First, the effect control CPU 101 executes (1) whether to execute a prefetch effect (holding change effect and background change effect) based on the winning determination table, and (2) if it executes the prefetch effect. The type and effect mode of the prefetch effect to be performed are determined (step S1020). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the symbol designation command (see FIG. 15), the number of reserved memories, and the extracted effect random number (step S1002) among the received commands at the time of starting winning a prize. And the winning determination table (FIG. 42). That is, the effect control CPU 101 determines a winning determination table to be used based on the number of reserved memories, determines a winning determination result based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and determines in advance for each winning determination result. Based on the ratio, (1) whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and (2) an effect mode when executing the prefetch effect is determined. These processes will be described more specifically.

  First, when the number of reserved memories is three or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines to use the winning determination table in FIG. In this case, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state in this example), it is confirmed whether or not the first reserved memory number is 3 or more, and the gaming state is a high base state (in this example, If the probability change state or the short time state), it is confirmed whether or not the second reserved memory number is 3 or more.

  Here, when the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of”, so the effect control CPU 101 determines the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode. 5%, the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 1%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 2%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 2%, and the look-ahead effect The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of not executing is 90%.

  When the symbol designation command is C401 (H), it is determined that the determination result at the time of winning is “15R normal big hit”. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 5%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the symbol designating command is C402 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R normal big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 5%, and the look-ahead effect is A determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 60%.

  When the symbol designation command is C403 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 30%.

  When the symbol designating command is C404 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the symbol designating command is C405 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “suddenly probable big hit”, and therefore the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10 %, The execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the first special mode is 5%, the execution rate of the background change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the look-ahead effect is The determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 45%.

  When the number of reserved memories is less than 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines to use the winning determination table shown in FIG. Unlike the winning determination table when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, this winning determination table is set not to execute the background change effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the background change effect is not executed when the number of reserved memories is less than 3.

  Here, when the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of”, so the effect control CPU 101 determines the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode. The determination process for the prefetch effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 1% and the ratio in which the prefetch effect is not executed is 90%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R probability big hit”, “5R probability big hit”, or “suddenly” Since it is determined that “probable big hit”, the CPU 101 for effect control has an execution rate of the hold change effect of the first special mode 10%, an execution rate of the hold change effect of the second special mode 20%, and the pre-read effect A determination process for the pre-reading effect is executed so that the ratio of the non-execution is 70%.

  As described above, in order to execute the pre-reading effect at a predetermined rate, the actual processing is as follows, for example. That is, if the production random number is defined as a random number in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and the number of reserved memories is 3 or more and the determination result at the time of winning is “out of”, the production random number is 0 to 4 If the range is within the range, the change in the first special mode is changed. If the production random number is 5, the change is in the second special mode. If the production random number is 6 or 7, the background change is in the first special mode. The effect control CPU 101 performs processing so that the background change effect of the second special mode is performed when the effect or effect random number is 8 or 9, and the prefetch effect is not executed when the effect random number is 10 to 99. In addition, the numerical value range defined as the random number for production is arbitrary, and it may be set so that each prefetch production is executed at a predetermined ratio as a result.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change effect is set to suggest the possibility of a big hit, and the background change effect is set to indicate the type of the big win. That is, it is set so that the possibility of a big hit is higher and the possibility of losing is lower in the case where the second special aspect is executed than the first special aspect among the pending change effects. In addition, when the background change effect of the first special mode is executed, the possibility of 15R big hit (15R normal big hit and 15R positive big hit) is set higher than 5R big hit (5R normal big hit and 5R probability big hit). Yes. In addition, when the background change effect of the second special mode is executed, there is a higher possibility of a probable big hit (15R probable big hit, 5R probable big hit, and sudden probable big hit) than a normal big hit (15R normal big hit and 5R normal big hit). It is set to be.

  In this way, by setting the winning decision table so that the hold change effect and the background change effect suggest the possibility of jackpot and the type of jackpot, respectively, so that the player pays attention to the hold change effect and the background change effect It is possible to improve interest.

  FIG. 43 is a table showing an example of the effect flag table. The effect flag table indicates whether or not each of the first hold display and each second hold display is a target of a prefetch effect, and a type of prefetch effect (hold) This is a storage area for storing a change effect or a background change effect) and a mode (first special mode or second special mode, or first special mode or second special mode). In addition, in this embodiment, the above information is also stored in the hold storage (that is, the change correspondence display) in which the start condition is satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the effect flag table stores a change correspondence display, a hold change effect flag, and a background change effect flag corresponding to each of the first hold display and each second hold display.

  The hold change effect flag includes a first special mode flag and a second special mode flag, and the background change effect flag includes a first special mode flag and a second special mode flag. In the above-described winning determination process, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the number of reserved memories including the reserved memory based on the starting prize when it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect based on the determination at the starting prize. To do. For example, when the first reserved memory number is 3, a new start prize is generated and the first reserved memory number becomes 4, and the pre-reading effect determination process is executed for the start prize, and the second special When it is determined to execute the background change effect of the aspect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second special aspect flag of the background change effect flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 in the effect flag table (see FIG. 43). ).

  The above is the process of step S1020 of the winning determination process. The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the hold change effect as a result of the process of step S1020 (step S1021). As a result, when it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1021), as described above, the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition) in the effect flag table. The production control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the production mode in correspondence with the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number after the addition update based on the reception of the designation command (step S1022). Then, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in either the determined first special mode or the second special mode (step S1023), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 101 has not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in step S1021), then the effect control CPU 101 continuously executes the background change effect up to which variable display. Decide what to do. In the present embodiment, when the big display is a big hit in the variation display with the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode), it is determined that the big hit of 15R, that is, the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit, In the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied with the background change effect of the mode (lightning strike mode), the following steps S1026 to S1032 are performed in order to determine that the probability change big hit, that is, the 15R positive change big hit, the 5R positive change big hit or the sudden positive change big hit. Execute the process.

  If the CPU 101 for effect control has not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in step S1021), it confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the background change effect as a result of the process of step S1020. This is performed (step S1025). If it is not decided to execute the background change effect (N in Step S1025), a new hold display is displayed in a normal manner (Step S1033), and the winning determination process is terminated. If it is decided to execute the background change effect (Y in step S1025), the effect control CPU 101 next confirms the mode of the background change effect.

  When the background change effect is the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1026), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command and determines whether or not the change display to be determined is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is determined that the 5R normal big hit, the 5R probability big hit, or the sudden probability big hit is not the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit (step S1027). As a result of this determination, when the change display of the determination target is a big hit other than 15R (Y in step S1027), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved memory count −1 (one immediately before the determination target) in the effect flag table. The background change effect flag of the first special mode corresponding to (holding display) is set (step S1028). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the determination target is a big hit of 15R (N in step S1027), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the current number of reserved memories (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table. A background change effect flag of one special mode is set (step S1029). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  If the background change effect is not the first special mode (sunny mode) (N in step S1026), it is determined that the background change effect is the second special mode (lightning strike mode). At this time, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the change display to be determined is a normal big hit, that is, a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit, and is not a 15R positive variation big hit, a 5R positive variation big hit, or a sudden positive random change big hit. Determination is made (step S1030). As a result of this determination, if the change display of the determination target is a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit (Y in step S1030), the production control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved memory count −1 (the decision target) in the production flag table. The background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the previous hold display) is set (step S1031). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the change display to be determined is not normally big hit, that is, when it is off, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit (N in step S1030), the production control CPU 101 displays the production flag. In the table, the background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the current number of reserved memories (the pending display of the determination target) is set (step S1032). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the determination target hold display in a normal manner (step S1033), and ends the winning determination process.

  The above is the specific process of the winning determination process (step S1005, FIG. 41) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 40).

  By performing the processing as described above, if there is a pending storage corresponding to a variable display other than the 15R big hit (15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit), the background change effect of the first special mode until the previous variable display. The continuous production ends. As a result, the player understands that the 15R jackpot is confirmed when the big hit is made while the background change effect of the first special mode is being executed, and the player pays attention to the background change effect. , Can improve interest. Similarly, regarding the relationship between the probability change big hit (15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, or sudden probability change big hit) and the background change effect of the second special mode, the player can perform while the background change effect of the second special mode is being executed. In the case of a big hit, it will be understood that a probable big hit will be established, and the player will pay attention to the background change effect, which can improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, since the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, when the gaming state is in the low base state (normal state in this example), the first reserved memory is used as the subject of advance notice. It is also conceivable that the change display of the second special symbol interrupts in the middle when the change effect is being executed. In this case, for example, the execution period of the background change effect may be extended according to the variable display of the interrupted second special symbol. Further, for example, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted, the background change effect may be canceled halfway.

(Hold change effect determination process (step S1007), FIG. 44)
As described above, when it is confirmed that only the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change effect determining process (step S1007). FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the hold change effect determination process (step S1007). FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of the hold change effect determination table.

  First, based on the hold change effect determination table, the effect control CPU 101 (1) whether or not to execute the hold change effect, and (2) the hold change effect to be executed when executing the hold change effect. An aspect is determined (step S1040). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designating command (see FIG. 15) of the received command at the time of start winning, the extracted effect random number (step S1002), and the hold change effect. It is determined by comparing with the determination table (FIG. 45). That is, the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and (1) whether to execute the hold change effect based on a predetermined ratio for each winning determination result. No, and (2) the effect mode when executing the hold change effect. These processes will be described more specifically.

  When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of place”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 10%, The determination process for the hold change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect of 2 special modes is 2% and the ratio of not executing the prefetch effect is 88%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, “5R normal big hit”, “15R positive change big hit”, “5R positive change big hit”, or “sudden probability change”. Because it is determined to be “big hit”, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the pre-reading effect with the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode 20%, the execution rate of the hold change effect in the second special mode 40%. The determination process for the on-hold change effect (one of the pre-read effects) is executed so that the ratio of not performing is 40%.

  As described above, in the hold change effect determination table of FIG. 45, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than the winning determination table of FIG. That is, when neither the on-hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed (when the winning determination process in step S1005 is executed), the determination is YES in step S1006. In the case where the hold change effect determination process in step S1007 is executed), the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode is increased.

  Here, the actual processing of the effect control CPU 101 is performed using the effect random numbers, but the processing is the same as the processing at the time of winning determination processing. That is, the numerical range of the random number for production and the corresponding hold change effect of the first special mode and the hold change effect of the second special mode are executed so that the hold change effect is executed at the predetermined ratio. A numerical value range and a numerical value range that does not execute the hold change effect may be set.

  The above is the process of step S1040 of the hold change effect determination process. In addition, although each process of step S1041-S1047 of a pending | holding change effect determination process is demonstrated concretely below, this process is the same as the process of step S1021-S1023 and step S1033 of a winning time determination process (FIG. 41), respectively. is there.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the hold change effect as a result of the process of step S1040 described above (step S1041). As a result, when it is not decided to execute the hold effect (N in step S1041), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1047) and ends the hold change effect determination process. To do. When it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1041), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the present hold memory number (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table according to the effect mode. The flag is set (step S1042). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the new hold display to be determined as the hold change effect of either the first special mode or the second special mode determined (step S1023), and the hold change effect determination process Exit.

  The above is the specific process of the hold change effect determination process (step S1007, FIG. 44) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 40).

(Background change effect determination processing (step S1009), FIG. 46)
As described above, when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more (Y in step S1008), the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect determining process (step S1009). FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the background change effect determination process (step S1009).

  First, the effect control CPU 101, based on the background change effect determination table, (1) whether or not to execute the background change effect, and (2) the effect of the background change effect to be executed when executing the background change effect. The aspect is determined. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designating command (see FIG. 15) of the received one set of winning prize commands, the extracted effect random number (step S1002), and the background change effect. It is determined by comparing with the determination table (FIG. 47). That is, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the determination result at the time of winning based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and (1) whether to execute the background change effect based on a predetermined ratio for each winning determination result. No, and (2) the effect mode when executing the background change effect is determined. These processes will be described more specifically.

  When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 4% 2. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the special mode is 4% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 92%.

  When the symbol designating command is C401 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R normal big hit”, and therefore the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 40%. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  When the symbol designating command is C402 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R normal big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution rate of the background change effect of the second special mode is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 80%.

  When the symbol designation command is C403 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “15R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 40%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 20%.

  When the symbol designating command is C404 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “5R probability variation big hit”, so the CPU 101 for effect control sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  When the symbol designating command is C405 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “suddenly promising big hit”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10%. The background change effect determination process is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect in the second special mode is 40% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 50%.

  As described above, in the background change effect determination table in FIG. 47, the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than the winning determination table in FIG. That is, when neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed (when the winning determination process of step S1005 is executed), when the hold change effect is executed (NO is determined in step S1006). In the case where the background change effect determination process in step S1009 is executed), the rate at which the background image changes to the first special mode or the second special mode is increased.

  Here, the actual process of the effect control CPU 101 is performed using the effect random number, but the process is the same as the process during the winning determination process and the pending change effect determination process. That is, the numerical range of the effect random number and the corresponding background change effect of the first special mode and the background change effect of the second special mode are executed so that the background change effect is executed at the predetermined ratio. A numerical value range and a numerical value range that does not execute the hold change effect may be set.

  The above is the process of step S1050 in the background change effect determination process. In addition, although each process of step S1051-S1060 of a background change effect determination process is demonstrated concretely below, this process is the same as that of step S1025-S1033 of a winning time determination process (FIG. 41). In the present embodiment, when a big hit is made during the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode), it is determined that the big hit of 15R, that is, the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability big hit, In the second special mode (lightning strike mode), when a big hit is made during the fluctuation display with the background change effect, the probability variation big hit, that is, the 15R probability variation big hit, the 5R probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined. Steps S1051 to S1059 are executed.

  The effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the background change effect as a result of the process of step S1050 described above (step S1051). As a result, when it is not determined to execute the background change effect (N in step S1051), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and background change effect determination processing Exit. When it is determined to execute the background change effect (Y in step S1051), the effect control CPU 101 next confirms the mode of the background change effect (step S1052).

  When the background change effect is the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1052), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command, and whether or not the change display to be determined is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is determined that it is a 5R normal big hit, a 5R probability big hit, or a sudden probability big hit, but not a 15R normal big hit or a 15R certain big hit (step S1054). As a result of this determination, when the variation display of the determination target is a big hit other than 15R (Y in step S1054), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the current reserved storage number −1 (one immediately before the determination target) in the effect flag table. The background change effect flag of the first special mode corresponding to (holding display) is set (step S1055). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, if the change display of the determination target is a big hit of 15R (N in step S1054), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the current number of reserved memories (the determination target hold display) in the effect flag table. A background change effect flag of one special mode is set (step S1056). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  If the background change effect is not the first special mode (sunny mode) (N in step S1052), it is determined that the background change effect is the second special mode (lightning strike mode). At this time, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the change display to be determined is a normal big hit, that is, a 15R normal big hit or a 5R normal big hit, and is not a 15R positive variation big hit, a 5R positive variation big hit, or a sudden positive random change big hit. Determination is made (step S1057). As a result of the determination, if the change display of the determination target is 15R normal big hit or 5R normal big hit (Y in step S1057), the CPU 101 for effect control has the current reserved memory number −1 (the determination target number in the effect flag table). The background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the previous hold display) is set (step S1058). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  On the other hand, when the variation display to be determined is not normally big hit, that is, when it is off, 15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit (N in step S1057), the production control CPU 101 displays the production flag. In the table, the background change effect flag of the second special mode corresponding to the current number of reserved memories (the pending display of the determination target) is set (step S1059). After the process, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display in a normal manner (step S1060), and ends the winning determination process.

  The above is the specific process of the background change effect determination process (step S1009, FIG. 46) of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the effect control CPU 101 confirms the symbol designation command in order to confirm the winning determination result has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this method. For example, the effect control CPU 101 can confirm whether the game is out of play or big hit also by confirming the variation category command instead of the symbol designating command.

  48 to 51 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process (step S800C). In the hold display control process, the production control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress (step S6000). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed is, for example, that the effect symbol is not being displayed (for example, the value of the variable time timer set in step S8007 to be described later is 0), and the first hold storage. And the second reserved memory number (for example, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number updated in steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 are 0). it can. If the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the hold display control process is terminated. In other words, even if a new start win occurs during the customer waiting demonstration display, since the variable display is started immediately and there is almost no time for displaying the hold display, the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed. The process is terminated as it is (without displaying the hold display).

  Note that even when the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, there is neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory, and the remaining time of the variable display being executed is very short and immediately before the end of the variable display (for example, the remaining Even if it is within 1 second), even if a new start win occurs, there is substantially no time for displaying the hold display, so the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed (hold) You may make it complete | finish a process as it is, without displaying a display.

  Also, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display is not started immediately after stopping the variation display of the production symbol, but the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last variation display was finished. If it is configured to start, since it is a period during which the display is not held and the variable display is not executed even during the predetermined period, it is determined as Y in step S6000, and the process is ended as it is. Also good.

  When the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed and it is determined as Y in step S6000 and the hold display control process is terminated, a hold memory number addition designation command (first hold memory number addition designation command, second hold memory number addition designation). Command) is not incremented even if a command is received, a subsequent subtraction designation command (first subtraction memory number subtraction designation command, second subtraction memory number subtraction designation command) is received. Control is performed so as not to delete the hold display without executing the processing of steps S663 and S667 of the command analysis processing. In this case, for example, if it is determined in step S655 or S658 of the command analysis process that it is determined that a new pending storage number addition designation command has been received, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed is confirmed. If a waiting demonstration is being displayed, a flag indicating that is set, and when a pending storage count subtraction designation command is received (see Y in steps S661 and S665), if the flag is set, step S663 is set. , S667 should not be executed. In this case, not only the process of increasing / decreasing the hold display but also the processes of steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 are skipped, and the process of increasing / decreasing the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number itself. May also be omitted.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a new start winning has occurred and a new start winning command has been received (step S6001). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start prize command storage area or the second start prize command storage area shown in FIG. 37, a new start prize will be generated and a new start prize will be given. It can be determined that the command is received.

  If a new start winning command has been received (Y in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state) (step S6002). ). Note that whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the probability variation state flag (see step S677) is set.

  If the state is not a certain change state (that is, if the gaming state is a short-time state (low probability / high base state) (in other words, during the short-time effect mode)), the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect. Using the hold notice determination table for determining whether or not, based on the newly received variable category command, perform a lottery process using a random number to determine whether to execute the hold notice effect, It is determined whether or not to execute the hold notice effect (step S6004).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute a hold notice effect. As shown in FIG. 52, each hold notice determination table is assigned a determination value for each of the no hold notice effect and the hold notice effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, in the pending notice determination table, when the change category command specifies that the change pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (specifically, the command C600 (H) is received). The change category command specifies that the change pattern type is super CA2-7 (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), and the change category command indicates super CA3. The determination value is assigned only when it is specified that the variation pattern type is −3 (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received). Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed only when the non-reach is out, the super reach is out, or the super reach big hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, when the non-reach is off, it is decided to execute the hold notice effect at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach is off, the rate is 60%. It is decided to execute the hold notice effect, and when it is a super reach big hit, it is decided to execute the hold notice effect at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, not only the aspect shown by this embodiment, you may comprise so that non-reach out, super reach out, and a change notice category other than super reach big hit may be performed. In this case, for example, it may be configured to specify only whether or not to win a big hit based on the variable category command and to execute the hold notice effect according to the specification result. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect (so-called “gase hold notice effect”) is executed also in the case of non-reach deviation or super-reach deviation is shown, but the case of non-reach deviation May be configured not to execute the hold notice effect, or to execute the hold notice effect only in the case of a super reach jackpot.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the case of the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) or the short time state (low probability / high base state), the processing of step S6004 or step S6012 described later is executed to perform the hold notice effect. Although it may be executed, as described above, when the time is short (high base state), the process for determining the winning time for the start winning to the first starting winning port 13 is not executed and the symbol designation is performed. Since no command or variable category command is transmitted (see step S1215A), the hold notice effect may be executed only for the second hold memory.

  When it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N in step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the appearance effect in the normal effect mode (step S6006).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability / high base state) or a short time state (low probability / high base state), a specific hold display different from the normal hold display is displayed. . The “specific hold display” is a hold display that displays an operation at a predetermined cycle. In this embodiment, a specific hold display is displayed that rotates once counterclockwise at a cycle of 1 second. Note that the “specific hold display” is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and may be, for example, one that swings in the left-right direction or the up-down direction at a predetermined period, as long as it displays an operation at a predetermined period. The pattern may change in size at a predetermined cycle, or the pattern or color in the hold display may change at a predetermined cycle.

  In this embodiment, when the specific hold display is displayed, the appearance effect is executed. The “appearance effect” is an effect that is executed in accordance with the display of the specific hold display. In this embodiment, as the appearance effect, the onset display is gradually darkened from a state in which the hold display is thin and difficult to see. The effect of the aspect which changes to the state which is easy to do is performed. In this embodiment, it takes about 1 second from the start of the appearance effect, and the density of the hold display is maximized so that it can be easily viewed.

  It should be noted that the “appearance effect” is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and may be any effect mode effect as long as it is an effect executed in accordance with the display of the specific hold display. For example, it is not limited to the one in which the density of the hold display is gradually changing, but as an appearance effect, an effect in which the size of the hold display is small and difficult to see and gradually changes to a state that is easy to see May be executed. In addition, it is not always necessary to display the hold display in the appearance effect, and if the player can recognize that it is being executed with the display of the specific hold display, without displaying the hold display as the appearance effect. You may perform the effect of the aspect which displays a predetermined character. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold display is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize after about 1 second from the start of the appearance effect is shown, but the effect period of the appearance effect is shown in this embodiment. For example, the appearance period of the appearance effect may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 second), and the hold display may be displayed almost immediately.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability / high base state), the operation display of the hold display is started from the execution of the appearance effect. Accordingly, in the case of the probability variation state (high probability / high base state), an effect that the density gradually increases while the on-hold display is operating is displayed, and the specific on-hold display is displayed while the appearance effect is being executed. The display is started in such a manner as to start. On the other hand, when the game state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the operation display of the hold display is started after the appearance effect is executed. Therefore, in the short-time state (low probability / high base state), an effect that the density gradually increases without displaying the on-hold display and the operation display of the on-hold display after the appearance effect is finished. Is started, and the display of the specific hold display is started after the appearance effect is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect, the specific hold display and the appearance effect are executed in the normal effect mode, but it is decided to execute the hold notice effect. In such a case, the specific hold display and the appearance effect are executed in the pre-reading notice mode. In this embodiment, the hold display is displayed in white triangle display inside the white triangle display, while the specific hold display and appearance effect of the normal effect mode are executed, while the hold display is displayed in white The specific hold display and the appearance effect of the pre-reading notice mode are executed in a mode of displaying in a red triangle display inside the round display. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the specific hold display and the appearance effect in the normal effect mode are also referred to as “normal specific hold display” and “normal appearance effect”, respectively. It is also called “specific hold display” or “prefetch appearance effect”.

  It should be noted that the modes of “normal specific hold display”, “normal appearance effect”, “prefetch specific hold display”, and “prefetch appearance effect” are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, but a hold notice effect (prefetch notice effect) ) Can be recognized as long as it can be recognized. For example, while the “normally specified hold display” or “normal appearance effect” rotates the hold display, the “prefetch specific hold display” or “prefetch appearance effect” swings the hold display horizontally or vertically. You may do it.

  In step S6006, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the normal appearance effect without the operation display of the hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending memory number addition designation command, If it is a memory number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the first reserved memory display unit 9a. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display portion 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9a is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area and one hold display is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold memory), the first hold memory display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area. On the other hand, if it is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the second reserved memory display unit 9b starts executing the normal appearance effect. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal appearance effect execution flag (no operation) indicating that the normal appearance effect is being executed without the operation display of the hold display (step S6007). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to an appearance effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the appearance effect (step S6008). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  When it is determined to execute the hold notice effect (Y of step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the prefetch appearance effect without the operation display of the hold display (step S6009). In this case, since the hold notice effect is executed when the second hold memory is incremented by 1, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the second area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read appearance appearance executing flag (no operation) indicating that the pre-read appearance effect that is not accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is being executed (step S6010). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6011). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  If the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state) (Y in step S6002; in other words, during the probable change effect mode), the effect control CPU 101 follows the same processing as in step S6004 and holds a pending notice. Based on the newly received variation category command, a lottery process using a random number is performed using the determination table to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect (step S6012).

  When it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N in step S6013), the effect control CPU 101 has already indicated the specific hold on the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit 9b (normally specified hold). It is confirmed whether or not “display, prefetch specific hold display” is displayed (step S6014). If the specific hold display has already been performed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6015). In this embodiment, as described above, the specific hold display is displayed in a manner in which the triangle display is displayed inside the round display, but there is a state in which one vertex of the triangle of the triangle display faces upward. It is assumed that the vehicle is in a predetermined reference operation position. If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that it does not immediately start the normal appearance effect but is waiting for the start of the normal appearance effect. A normal standby flag is set (step S6016). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6014) or when the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6015), the production control CPU 101 Then, the execution of the normal appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display is started (step S6017). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending memory number addition designation command, If it is a memory number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the first reserved memory display unit 9a. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display portion 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9a is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area and one hold display is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold memory), the first hold memory display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area. On the other hand, if it is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the second reserved memory display unit 9b starts executing the normal appearance effect. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area.

  When the execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied with the operation display of the hold display is started in step S6017, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the round display of the hold display). It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle faces upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal appearance effect executing flag (with motion) indicating that the normal appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display is being executed (step S6018). The effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6019). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  When it is determined to execute the hold notice effect (Y in step S6013), the effect control CPU 101 has already displayed the specific hold (usually specific hold) on the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit 9b. It is confirmed whether or not “display, pre-read specific hold display” is displayed (step S6020). If the specific hold display has already been performed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6021). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the prefetch appearance effect is not started immediately but is waiting for the start of the prefetch appearance effect. A prefetch standby flag is set (step S6022). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6020) or when the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6021), the effect control CPU 101 Then, execution of the prefetch appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display is started (step S6023). In this case, since the hold notice effect is executed when the second hold memory is incremented by 1, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the second area.

  When the execution of the prefetch appearance effect accompanied with the operation display of the hold display is started in step S6023, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the round display of the hold display). It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle faces upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch appearance effect executing flag (with motion) indicating that the prefetch appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display is being executed (step S6024). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6025). Then, control goes to a step S6027.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal standby flag is set (step S6027). If the normal standby flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6028). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal standby flag (step S6029).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the normal appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display (step S6030). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending memory number addition designation command, If it is a memory number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the first reserved memory display unit 9a. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display portion 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9a is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area and one hold display is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold memory), the first hold memory display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area. On the other hand, if it is the second reserved memory number addition designation command, the second reserved memory display unit 9b starts executing the normal appearance effect. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second area.

  When the execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started in step S6030, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the round display of the hold display). It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle faces upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal appearance effect executing flag (with motion) (step S6031). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6032). Then, control goes to a step S6039.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prefetch standby flag is set (step S6033). If the prefetch standby flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6034). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch standby flag (step S6035).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the prefetch appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (step S6036). In this case, since the hold notice effect is executed when the second hold memory is incremented by 1, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. At this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display portion 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first hold storage display portion 9b is the first one If the execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the area of, and one hold display is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold memory), the second hold memory display unit 9b The execution of the prefetch appearance effect is started in the second area.

  When the execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started in step S6036, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the round display of the hold display). It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle faces upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch appearance effect executing flag (with motion) (step S6037). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second in this example) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6038). Then, control goes to a step S6039.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038 is executed, so that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state), the already displayed specific Control is performed so as to start execution of an appearance effect (normal appearance effect, prefetch appearance effect) accompanied by an operation display of the hold display in a manner synchronized with the operation display of the hold display.

  In this embodiment, the operation display of the hold display is “synchronized” so that the timing at which the hold display becomes a predetermined reference operation position is the same among a plurality of hold displays accompanied by the operation display. It is to be. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed or when an appearance effect accompanied by a hold display operation is executed, the triangles of the triangle display inside the round display of the hold display are displayed. Display control is performed so that the timing at which one vertex is directed upward is the same timing.

  The mode for synchronizing the operation display of the hold display is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, even if there is a mixture of hold displays with different operation cycles, such as when there are a plurality of hold displays that have a rotation cycle of 1 second and 2 seconds, the hold display is upward. The timing for turning to the same state is the same timing (in this case, when the hold display with a rotation cycle of 2 seconds turns once again and goes up again, the hold display with a rotation cycle of 1 second turns twice and goes up again. It will be a direction). In addition, for example, there is a holding display that rotates and a holding display that swings, and even when there are mixed holding displays with different operation modes, one of the holding displays faces upward. When the rotation operation is started and the other hold display is started to swing up and down from the lowest position, one hold display is turned upward again after one cycle of operation. The other hold display may again be in the position at the lower end. As such, it is only necessary that the timing at which the hold display becomes the predetermined reference motion position is the same timing in some form.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state) by executing the processes of steps S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038, a new start prize is generated. If the specific hold display already displayed at the timing is not the predetermined reference motion position, it waits until it reaches the predetermined reference motion position, and then the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (normal appearance effect, look-ahead appearance) By starting the execution of the effect, the appearance effect accompanied with the operation display of the hold display is executed in a manner synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed. Therefore, there is a time lag between the timing at which the start winning is generated and the timing at which the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started, but in this embodiment, the operation cycle of the hold display is Since it is about 1 second, there is no great sense of incongruity.

  It should be noted that an appearance effect (for example, a still image) is displayed in a mode that is not accompanied by an operation display at the timing when the start prize is generated, and the operation display of the appearance effect is started at the timing when the predetermined reference operation position is reached. It may be. Further, for example, the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display may be started in synchronization with the hold display already displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the start winning prize without waiting for the predetermined reference operation position. In this case, for example, the appearance effect accompanying the operation of the hold display is always executed in the background, and the display of the appearance effect that was executed in the background is started at the timing of the start winning. do it.

  In addition, as shown in this embodiment, after a new start prize is generated, an appearance effect accompanied by an operation display of a hold display after waiting until a predetermined reference operation position (position where the operation display can be synchronized) is reached. When configured to execute, there may be a case in which a new start prize is generated while waiting for a position where the operation display can be synchronized. In such a case, for example, information such as the appearance effect for the on-hold hold and the specific hold display mode is temporarily stored, and the processes of S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038 are executed for the latest start winning. You can do it. And even if there are a plurality of holds, the synchronization timing of the action display in the appearance effect and specific hold display is the same, so when it becomes a position where the action display can be synchronized with the latest start prize, The appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display may be started simultaneously by simultaneously starting the appearance effect with respect to the latest hold and the appearance effect with respect to the hold on standby.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer is 0 (step S6039). If the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6040). Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer after subtraction is 0 (step S6041).

  If the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the effect period of the appearance effect ends), the effect control CPU 101 is set with a normal appearance effect execution flag (no operation). It is confirmed whether or not (step S6042). If the normal appearance effect execution flag (no operation) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal appearance effect execution flag (no operation) (step S6043).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the specific hold display (normal specific hold display, pre-read specific hold display) is already displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a or the second hold memory display unit 9b ( Step S6044). If the specific hold display has already been displayed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6045). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the production control CPU 101 does not immediately start the display of the normal specific hold display and waits for the display of the normal specific hold display to start. The normal hold standby flag indicating that it is present is set (step S6046). Then, control goes to a step S6059.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6044) or when the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6045), the effect control CPU 101 Then, display of the normal specific hold display is started (step S6047). In this case, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a, the effect control CPU 101 is usually specified at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. Increase the hold display by one. Further, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b, the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the specific specific hold at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b. Increase the display by one.

  When display of the normal specific hold display is started in step S6047, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of a triangular display triangle inside the round display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where is facing upward.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal appearance effect that was executed before the processing of step S6047, the effect that the density of the hold display gradually increases is performed. Is displayed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display is gradually increased to be easily visible.

  If the normal appearance effect execution flag (no operation) is not set (N in step S6042), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the prefetch appearance effect execution flag (no operation) is set ( Step S6048). If the pre-read appearance effect execution flag (no operation) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pre-read appearance effect execution flag (no operation) (step S6049).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the specific hold display (normal specific hold display, pre-read specific hold display) is already displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a or the second hold memory display unit 9b ( Step S6050). If the specific hold display has already been performed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6051). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the production control CPU 101 does not immediately start the display of the prefetch specific hold display but waits for the display start of the prefetch specific hold display. A pre-read hold flag indicating that the image has been received is set (step S6052). Then, control goes to a step S6059.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6050) or when the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6051), the effect control CPU 101 The display of the pre-read specific hold display is started (step S6053). In this case, the fact that the hold notice effect is executed is a case where the second hold memory is incremented by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 has executed the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. Increase the pre-read specific hold display by 1.

  When the display of the pre-read specific hold display is started in step S6053, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where is facing upward.

  In this embodiment, the look-ahead appearance effect that was executed before the processing of step S6053 is performed such that the density of the hold display gradually increases. Is displayed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display is gradually increased to be easily visible.

  If the pre-read appearance effect executing flag (no action) is not set (N in step S6048), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the normal appearance effect executing flag (with action) is set ( Step S6054). If the normal appearance effect executing flag (with motion) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal appearance effect executing flag (with motion) (step S6055).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying the normal specific hold display (step S6056). In this case, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a, the effect control CPU 101 is usually specified at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. Increase the hold display by one. Further, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b, the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the specific specific hold at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b. Increase the display by one.

  In this embodiment, the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display is executed before the process of step S6056 is executed, and the effect period of the appearance effect is just at the timing when the operation display of the operation cycle of one cycle is performed. Is ended and the normal specific display is switched in the process of step S6056. Therefore, even when a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed, the normal specific hold display is displayed in synchronization with the operation display of other specific hold displays. Will be. In addition, visually, a display is performed so that the density of the hold display is gradually increased while the operation display of the hold display is executed, so that the display becomes easy to visually recognize.

  If the normal appearance effect execution flag (with motion) is not set (N in step S6054, that is, if the prefetch appearance effect execution flag (with motion) is set), the effect control CPU 101 performs prefetch appearance. The effect execution flag (with motion) is reset (step S6057).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying the prefetch specific hold display (step S6058). In this case, the fact that the hold notice effect is executed is a case where the second hold memory is incremented by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 has executed the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. Increase the pre-read specific hold display by 1.

  In this embodiment, the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display is executed before the process of step S6058 is executed, and the effect period of the appearance effect is just at the timing when the operation display of the operation cycle of one cycle is performed. Is completed and the process of step S6058 is switched to the prefetch specific display, so even if a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed, the prefetch specific hold display is displayed in synchronization with the operation display of other specific hold displays. Will be. In addition, visually, a display is performed so that the density of the hold display is gradually increased while the operation display of the hold display is executed, so that the display becomes easy to visually recognize.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal hold standby flag is set (step S6059). If the normal hold standby flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6060). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal hold standby flag (step S6061).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying the normal specific hold display (step S6062). In this case, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a, the effect control CPU 101 is usually specified at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the first reserved storage display unit 9a. Increase the hold display by one. Further, when the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b, the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the specific specific hold at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second reserved memory display unit 9b. Increase the display by one.

  When the display of the normal specific hold display is started in step S6062, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where is facing upward.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal appearance effect that was executed before the process of step S6062 was executed, the effect that the density of the hold display gradually increases is performed. Is displayed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display is gradually increased to be easily visible.

  If the normal hold flag is not set (N in step S6059), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prefetch hold flag is set (step S6063). If the prefetch hold standby flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6064). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch hold standby flag (step S6065).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts displaying the prefetch specific hold display (step S6066). In this case, the fact that the hold notice effect is executed is a case where the second hold memory is incremented by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 has executed the prefetch appearance effect in the second hold memory display unit 9b. Increase the pre-read specific hold display by 1.

  When the display of the pre-read specific hold display is started in step S6066, the hold display is in a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where is facing upward.

  In this embodiment, the look-ahead appearance effect that was executed before the processing of step S6066 is performed such that the density of the hold display gradually increases. Is displayed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display is gradually increased to be easily visible.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state) by executing the processing of steps S6042 to S6053 and S6059 to S6066, the operation display of the hold display is displayed. After performing the appearance effect (normal appearance effect, pre-read appearance effect) that is not accompanied, control is performed such that the operation display of the hold display is started in a manner synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display that is already displayed. In this case, when the specific hold display already displayed at the timing when the effect period of the appearance effect ends is not the predetermined reference operation position, the specific hold display is displayed after waiting until it reaches the predetermined reference operation position. The operation display of the hold display is started. In this embodiment, the moving image data used for the appearance effect without the operation display of the hold display has the maximum density for a predetermined period (for example, one second of the operation cycle) even after the appearance period of the appearance effect has elapsed. It is assumed that there is a data length sufficient to display the hold display in the displayed state, and the hold display can be displayed without interruption even if the display of the specific hold display is started after waiting until the timing at which the operation display is synchronized.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed by executing steps S6009, S6023, S6036, S6053, S6058, and S6066 and displaying the prefetch appearance effect and the prefetch specific hold display. As the display is started and the second hold display is digested one by one, the display position of the prefetch specific hold display for the advance notice is shifted one by one, and finally the prefetch specific hold display for the advance notice is consumed. By erasing from the second hold storage display unit 9b, the hold notice effect ends (see step S667).

  In this embodiment, when determining whether or not there is a specific hold display that is already displayed in steps S6014, S6044, and S6050, whether the specific hold display is a normal specific hold display or a pre-read specific hold display. There is no particular distinction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the normal specific hold display is already displayed, the prefetch specific hold display is newly displayed, or when the prefetch specific hold display is already displayed, the normal specific hold display is newly displayed. It is possible to display the normal specific hold display and the pre-read specific hold display at the same time, the normal specific hold display operation display and the pre-read specific hold display operation display It is supposed to synchronize.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state (mode), the mode of hold display, the presence / absence of appearance effects, and the synchronization timing of the operation display of the hold display. In this embodiment, when the hold display control process shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 is executed, as shown in FIG. 53, the gaming state is the probability change state (probability change effect mode) and the time reduction state (time reduction effect). Mode), the specific hold display is displayed as the hold display, and the appearance effect is executed in accordance with the display of the specific hold display. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state (normal effect mode), the normal mode hold display is displayed and the appearance effect is not executed. However, when the gaming state is the normal state (normal effect mode), the pre-read effect determining process (step S800B) is executed, whereby the hold change effect is executed, and the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second state. It may be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 39). In addition, when it is a normal state (normal production | presentation mode), you may comprise so that an appearance production | generation may be performed although the hold display of a normal mode is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 53, when the gaming state is the probability change state (probability change effect mode), when the specific hold display is already displayed, the specific hold already being displayed from the execution of the appearance effect is displayed. The operation display of the hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 53, when the gaming state is the short time state (short time effect mode), the specific hold display that is already displayed after the execution of the appearance effect when the specific hold display is already displayed. The operation display of the hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the pre-reading effect determination process (step S800B) is executed to execute the hold change effect and the background change effect, and the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the case where the appearance display and the specific hold display are displayed by executing the hold display control process (step S800C) has been described. The background change effect, the appearance effect, and the display of the specific hold display may be appropriately combined and executed.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the pre-reading effect determination process (step S800B) is executed to execute the hold change effect and the background change effect. There may be a case where a big hit occurs before the display is ended and the gaming state is shifted to a probable change state or a short time state. In such a case, even after the game state has changed, the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed according to the determination content of the pre-reading effect determination process (step S800B) until the change display of the notice target ends. It is desirable to control so that it does. Alternatively, when the game state changes in the middle, the execution of the hold change effect or the background change effect may be canceled.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the on-hold display control process (step S800C) is executed to display the appearance effect or the specific on-hold display. When a big hit occurs before the target variation display ends and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic variation state to the short-time state, or when 100 variations display ends and the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state There is also a possibility. In such a case, even after the game state has changed, the appearance effect is executed in accordance with the determination content of the hold display control process (step S800C), and the specific hold is made until the variable display of the notice target ends. It is desirable to control to display the display. Alternatively, when the game state changes in the middle, the appearance effect or the display of the specific hold display may be canceled.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result specifying command indicates “normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit)” (the received display result specifying command is the display result 2 specifying command or the display result). In the case of 3 designation commands), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even symbols as the stop symbols. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates “probability change big hit (15R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit)” (the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command). ), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbols.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 6 designation command or a display result 7 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. Also, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 5R probability variation big hit), the left, middle and right are stopped and displayed with the odd number symbols aligned, so the odd number symbols will be the probability variation big hit. Recall. Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit (15R normal big hit, 5R normal big hit), the left, middle and right are stopped and displayed with the even numbered symbols aligned, so even numbered symbols will not be probable big hits ( It is usually a big hit). Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a non-probable symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the hold notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect blade role, etc.) The notice effect setting process for determining whether to execute the object notice effect or setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8003).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes process table selection processing according to the variation pattern or the like (step S8004). The specific operation of the process table selection process will be described later. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. If it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Here, in this embodiment, the image data related to the fluctuation-corresponding display in the fluctuation-corresponding display area 180 and the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit 9b is set in the process table. Instead, it is created by the production control CPU 101 and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM. The VDP 109 executes the display control set in the process table and the image data of a predetermined area related to the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area 180, the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit 9b. A signal based on the data obtained by superimposing the image data based on the data is output to the effect display device 9. In this manner, the effect control device 9 displays the background image and effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol, and the change correspondence display and the hold display.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control stores the contents (first special mode flag value, second special mode flag) associated with the variation corresponding display, each first hold display, and each second hold display in the effect flag table (FIG. 43). Value, first special mode flag value, and second special mode flag value) are shifted (step S8008). Specifically, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), The storage contents associated with the 1 hold display 1 are shifted to the storage contents associated with the fluctuation corresponding display, and the storage contents associated with the first hold displays 2 to 4 are associated with the first hold displays 1 to 3, respectively. Shift to the stored contents. Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second hold display The memory content associated with 1 is shifted to the memory content associated with the fluctuation-corresponding display, and the memory content associated with the second hold displays 2-4 is stored with the memory contents associated with the second hold displays 1-3, respectively. Shift to.

  Here, in this embodiment, the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag associated with the first hold display 1 or the second hold display 1 are associated with the change corresponding display after the stored contents are shifted. In step S1003, S1004, and step S1006 of the pre-reading effect determination process described above, when checking whether the hold change effect flag or the background change effect flag is set, the first hold display or the second hold Whether or not the hold change effect flag and the background change effect flag are set is set not only for the display but also for the change corresponding display corresponding to the change display for which the start condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the stored contents of the variation-corresponding display to determine whether or not the variation-corresponding display is in a special mode and a mode (first (first)) It is possible to confirm the special mode or the second special mode), and whether or not the background image is a special mode and the mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) when the background image is a special mode.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 displays the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b in the change corresponding display area 180 (displays as a change corresponding display). Step S8009). In addition, the hold display displayed after that is one by one at the timing of receiving the hold memory number subtraction designation command (the first hold memory number subtraction designation command or the second hold memory number subtraction designation command) in the command analysis process. Shifted (see steps S663 and S667). That is, the object is displayed in the display area where the display flag in the display control table is set. Here, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b is maintained even when the display mode is shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180. It is assumed that the display mode is maintained even when the hold display displayed thereafter is shifted.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8010).

(Process table selection processing (step S8004), FIG. 58)
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing process table selection processing (step S8004). In the process table selection process, the effect control CPU 101 first refers to the effect flag table and confirms whether or not the first special mode flag (flag in fine weather mode) corresponding to other than the change display is set (see FIG. Step S2040). In this embodiment, the process table selection process (step S8004) is executed before the effect flag table is shifted (step S8008) (see FIG. 43). Therefore, in the process table selection process, when determining whether or not the background change effect accompanying the change display to be executed thereafter is executed, the background change effect flag other than the change corresponding display is checked. ing.

  If the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display of the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2040), the CPU 101 for effect control has a process table corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the first special mode. Is selected (step S2041), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol will be in the mode of fine weather mode in the variable display performed.

  If the first special mode flag corresponding to a display other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2040), then the effect control CPU 101 performs the first corresponding to the display other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table. It is confirmed whether or not the 2 special mode flag (lightning strike mode flag) is set (step S2042). If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2042), the effect control CPU 101 determines the process table corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the second special mode. Is selected (step S2043), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol becomes a mode of a lightning strike mode in the fluctuation display performed.

  If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2042), that is, the background change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set at all. If not, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern without the background change effect (step S2045), and ends the process table selection process. When selecting a process table that does not involve a background change effect, a process table that becomes a background image corresponding to the gaming state may be selected. For example, if a background image corresponding to each of the high probability high base state, the low probability high base state, and the low probability low base state is prepared and the background change effect is not accompanied, the current game state is selected. A background image process table may be selected.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S8105, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 when the movable object notice effect is executed, or the effect blade effect notice effect is produced. When performing the above, an effect of moving the effect blades 79a and 79b by driving the motor 87 is performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 even when the super reach effect is executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8107).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4040.

  If it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a mode extension determination process (step S4020). This mode extension determination process will be described later. Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 54, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the variation corresponding display displayed in the variation corresponding display area 180 of the effect display device 9 (step S4040). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets all effect flags corresponding to the change correspondence display in the effect flag table (step S4041).

(Mode extension determination process (step S4020), FIG. 61)
In the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is also executed while the background change effect (continuous effect) is being executed, the background change effect being executed is continued until the variable display corresponding to the hold change effect ends. The production control CPU 101 performs a mode extension determination process. Hereinafter, the mode extension determination process will be specifically described.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the mode extension determination process (step S4020). First, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the effect flag table (FIG. 43) and confirms whether or not the background change effect flag corresponding to the change display is set (step S4060). If the effect change effect flag is not set (N in step S4060), effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process.

  When the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4060), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the hold change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display is set. (Step S4061). When the hold change effect flag is not set (N in step S4061), the effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process.

  When the pending change effect flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4061), the effect control CPU 101 first checks the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the first special mode flag is set (step S4062). This process means that it is confirmed whether or not the change display being executed at that time is accompanied by a background change effect.

  When the flag of the first special mode corresponding to the change correspondence display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S4062), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4062A. Here, the production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display when the second special symbol variation display is terminated. It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation display corresponding to 1) is a big hit other than 15R, that is, a 5R normal big hit, a 5R probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit (step S4062A). Specifically, with reference to the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the command storage area at the start winning prize, symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variable jackpot designation), symbol 6 designation ( (Sudden probability change big hit designation) or any of the above (design 1 designation (outgoing designation), design 2 designation (15R normal big hit designation), design 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation)) Check. The symbol designation commands corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variation jackpot designation), symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation jackpot designation). If any one of them is satisfied (Y in step S4062A), the effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process. By doing in this way, when the variable display which becomes big hits other than 15R is performed, it can avoid performing the background change effect of the 1st special mode (clear sky mode). That is, when a big hit is made in the first special mode (sunny mode), control is always made so as to be a big hit of 15R. When the player becomes a big hit at the time of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode), the player expects to be a big hit of 15R in advance, and can improve the interest.

  The production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display 1 when the second special symbol variation display is terminated). When the corresponding fluctuation display does not become a big hit other than 15R (N in step S4062A), specifically, the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area is symbol 1 designation (offset designation), In the case of either symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or symbol 4 designation (15R probability variable jackpot designation), the effect control CPU 101 performs the first special corresponding to the first hold display in the effect flag table. An aspect flag is set (step S4063). Thereby, the background image of the variable display performed next becomes a 1st special aspect (clear sky mode).

  On the other hand, if the flag of the first special mode corresponding to the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S4062), that is, if the flag of the second special mode is set, the effect control The CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S4062B. Here, the production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display when the second special symbol variation display is terminated. It is confirmed whether or not the variable display corresponding to 1) is usually a big hit (step S4062B). Specifically, referring to the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, whether it corresponds to the symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or the symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation), Also, it is confirmed whether it corresponds to any of the above (design 1 designation (disconnection designation), design 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation), symbol 5 designation (5R probability variation big hit designation), symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation big hit designation)). When the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area corresponds to either symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) or symbol 3 designation (5R normal jackpot designation) (in step S4062B). Y) The effect control CPU 101 ends the mode extension determination process. By doing so, it is possible to avoid executing the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) when the variable display that is usually a big hit is executed. That is, when a big hit is made in the second special mode (lightning strike mode), the control is always made to be a probable big hit. When the player wins a big hit at the time of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode), the player expects that it will be a big hit of 15R in advance, and can improve the interest.

  The production control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (the first hold display 1 when the first special symbol variation display is terminated, and the second hold display 1 when the second special symbol variation display is terminated). When the corresponding fluctuation display is not normally a big hit (N in step S4062B), specifically, the symbol designation command corresponding to the storage area 1 of the command storage area at the start winning prize is the designation of the symbol 4 (15R probability variable big hit designation). In the case of either design 5 designation (5R probability variation big hit designation) or symbol 6 designation (sudden probability variation big hit designation), that is, in the case of probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 101 is the first in the effect flag table. The second special mode flag corresponding to the on-hold display is set (step S4064). Thereby, the background image of the variable display to be executed next becomes the second special mode (lightning strike mode).

  In this way, by executing the mode extension determination process for extending the background change effect, when the hold change effect is also executed while the background change effect is being executed, the background change effect being executed is changed to the hold change effect. This will continue until the corresponding variable display is completed. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the background change effect ends before the pending change effect is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In step S4063 and step S4064 of the mode extension determination process, the background change effect flag of the first special mode or the second special mode corresponding to the first hold display 1 or the second hold display 1 is set to change the background change. The effect is processed until the next first hold display or the second hold display fluctuating display is performed, but in correspondence with the first hold display or the second hold display in which the flag of the hold change effect is set, The same processing is possible even if this background change effect flag is set.

(Specific examples of hold change effects and background change effects)
Next, specific examples of the hold change effect and the background change effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the hold change effect and the background change effect shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 show a first case in which the hold change effect is executed first and the background change effect is executed later, and FIGS. 64 and 65 show that the background change effect is executed first and the hold change effect is shown later. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on the effect display apparatus 9 in the 2nd case performed, respectively.

  First, the effect image of the first case will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), first, the first hold memory number is 3, and the variable display is executed in a state where the three hold displays in the normal mode are displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a. Shall. In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved memory number becomes four. Then, in the determination at the time of starting winning, it is determined that there is a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and neither the holding change effect nor the background change effect is executed, so that the winning determination process (step S1005) is executed, It is assumed that it is determined that the holding change effect of the first special mode (“heat” character) is executed using the winning determination table (FIG. 42). As a result, the production control CPU 101 sets the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the production flag table in accordance with the execution of the hold change production of the first special mode. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the fourth hold display is displayed with the “heat” character in the first special mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol of “285” is derived) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. The first pending storage number decreases from 4 to 3. At this time, since the first hold display is shifted, the flags in the effect flag table (see FIG. 43) are also shifted. The fourth hold display displayed with the “heat” character in the first special mode is displayed as the third hold display.

  In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is generated in the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved memory number is increased from 3 to 4. Then, it is determined that the 15R probability variation jackpot is determined at the time of starting winning (design designation command is 15R probability variation jackpot designation), and the pending change effect has already been executed, so that the background change effect determination process (step S1009) is executed, It is determined that the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed using the background change effect determination table (FIG. 47) in which the background change effect is executed more than the winning determination table. It shall be assumed. The effect control CPU 101 sets a second special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the effect flag table in accordance with the execution of the background change effect in the second special mode. Note that the hold change effect of the first special mode is already being executed, and the flag of the first special mode is set in the effect flag table, so that the hold change effect is not further executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), the fourth hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol “376” is deviated) is derived and displayed.

  Then, the next variable display is started, and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. The first pending storage number decreases from 4 to 3. Here, the flag of the background change effect of the second special mode corresponding to the first hold display 3 of the updated effect flag table is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62 (g), the effect control CPU 101 executes a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the second special mode (lightning strike mode).

  As described above, when the hold change effect is being executed, it is determined to execute the background change effect at a higher rate than when the hold change effect is not being executed. Will be increased in parallel, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. Also, in this embodiment, when a start change is made, if a hold change effect is executed targeting a change display executed before the change display corresponding to the start win, the start win is supported. The ratio of executing the background change effect with the changed display as a target is increased, so that the background change effect is continuously executed even after the hold change effect ends. Even if there is, the player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, even when the variation corresponding display in the variation corresponding display area 180 is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, the ratio of executing the background change effect is increased. Therefore, the player's interest can be preferably improved by both the display mode of the change correspondence display and the background change effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), FIG. 63 (i), and FIG. 63 (j), the derivation display of the display result of the twice variation display accompanied by the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode). , And the shift of the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is executed. After deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display shown in FIG. 63 (j), the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted as shown in FIG. 63 (k), and the hold display of the first special mode is performed. Are shifted to the fluctuation corresponding display area 180. As a result, the fluctuation corresponding display is displayed in the first special mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 63 (l), since the symbol designating command is the non-designated designation for the variation display that is the target of the pending change effect of the first special display ("heat" character) as described above. In addition, the display result of the variable display becomes a deviated symbol (here, a deviated symbol of “597”).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (m), the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the background change effect is shifted to the variable display area, and the variable display is started. In the determination at the time of starting winning, the symbol designation command corresponding to this variation display is symbol 4 designation (15R probability variation big hit designation) as described above, and the second special mode flag corresponding to variation corresponding display in the effect flag table is set. It is in the set state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (n), the variable display with the background change effect and the reach effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed, and as shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol (here “777”) is derived and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the control is performed so as to be a big hit of 15R whenever a big hit is caused by the variable display accompanied by the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode). As a result, the player expects that a big hit will occur especially in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the background image and improving the gaming interest. be able to. Further, in this embodiment, the control is performed so as to be surely a big hit in the case of a big hit in a variable display accompanied by a background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode). As a result, the player expects that a big hit will occur especially in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the second special mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the background image and improving the game entertainment. be able to.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the background change effect that is a continuous effect is executed as a pre-read effect, the player can change the start condition not being satisfied by executing the background change effect. The display has a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is made in the determination at the time of the start winning prize, the holding change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined to be out of play, and the 15R big hit is made in the determination at the time of the start winning prize. When it is determined that the background change effect of the first special mode is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined that it is a big hit other than 15R. That is, it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the 15R big hit is caused by the background image. Therefore, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a big hit is made in the determination at the time of starting winning, the holding change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined to be out of play, and the probability variation big win is determined in the determination at the time of starting winning. When it is determined, the background change effect of the second special mode is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined that it is normally a big hit. That is, since it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is likely to be caused by the background image, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the big win other than 15R is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning and it is determined to execute the background change effect of the first special mode, the variation display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. The background change effect of the first special mode is terminated before it is executed. Therefore, the player can expect the background change effect of the first special mode to continue as long as possible, and can further improve the interest of the background change effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made in the determination at the time of starting winning and it is determined to execute the background change effect of the second special mode, the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is executed. The background change effect of the second special mode is terminated before the first. Therefore, the player comes to expect that the background change effect of the second special mode will continue as long as possible, and can further improve the interest of the background change effect.

  Next, the effect image of the second case will be described. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), first, the first hold memory number is 2, and the variable display is executed in a state where two normal hold displays are displayed on the first hold memory display unit 9a. Shall. In this state, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening 13 and the first reserved storage number is three. Then, in the determination at the time of starting winning, it is determined that there is a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and neither the holding change effect nor the background change effect is executed, so that the winning determination process (step S1005) is executed, It is assumed that the background change effect in the first special mode (sunny mode) is determined to be executed using the winning determination table (FIG. 42). As a result, the production control CPU 101 sets the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 3 of the production flag table in accordance with the execution of the background change production of the first special mode. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the display result of the variable display (here, the “178” off symbol) is derived and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), while the next variable display is started, the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted, and the first hold storage number decreases from 3 to 2. Further, the first hold display is shifted, and the flags in the effect flag table are also shifted. At this time, since the background change effect flag of the first special mode flag (clear sky mode) corresponding to the first hold display 2 of the effect flag table is set by the previous effective start winning, the effect control CPU 101 Change the image to a clear sky mode and start the variable display.

  In this state, it is assumed that the effective start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs twice and the first reserved memory number is increased from 2 to 4. Then, the judgment at the first start winning prize is judged as a deviation (design designation command is designated as a deviation), and the judgment at the second start prize is judged as 15R normal big hit (the design designation command is designated as 15R normal big hit). Shall. At this time, in the determination at the time of the second start winning, the background change effect is already executed, so that the hold change effect determination process (step S1007) is executed, and the hold change effect is executed more than the winning determination table. It is assumed that it is determined that the hold change effect of the second special mode (flame effect) is executed using the hold change effect determination table (FIG. 45) in which the ratio of the change is increased. The CPU 101 for effect control sets the second special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 4 of the effect flag table in accordance with the determination of the hold change effect of the second special mode in the second effective start winning. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the fourth hold display is displayed in the second special mode (flame effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol “634” off) is derived and displayed.

  As described above, when the background change effect is being executed, it is determined to execute the hold change effect at a higher rate than when the background change effect is not being executed. Will be increased in parallel, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. Also, in this embodiment, when a start winning prize is given, if a background change effect is executed targeting a variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, the start prize is supported. The ratio of executing the hold change effect with the changed display as a target has been increased, so that the hold change effect is continuously executed even after the change display that has been the target of the background change effect in the judgment at the start winning prize is finished. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the variation display that is the target of the background change effect in the determination at the time of starting winning is finished.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 4 to 3. Here, the flag of the background change effect in the first special mode corresponding to the first hold display 1 in the updated effect flag table is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), the display result of the variable display (here, the “397” off symbol) is derived and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (i), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 3 to 2. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the effect flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Here, in the variation correspondence display area 180, a variation correspondence display corresponding to the variation display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of starting winning is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (j), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol “246” deviated) is derived and displayed.

  Thereby, the variable display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of starting winning is completed. At this time, there is no reserved memory that is the target of the background change effect. However, since the hold change effect flag (second special mode flag) corresponding to the first hold display 2 of the effect flag table is set at this time, the effect control CPU 101 performs the mode extension determination process (step of FIG. 47). In step S4020 (FIG. 61), a process (step S4063) is executed, in which the background image of variable display to be executed next is set to the first special mode. Thus, the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 2 to 1. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the effect flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the display result of the variable display (here, the symbol of “875”) is derived and displayed.

  At this time, there is no longer any reserved memory that is the subject of the background change effect. However, since the hold change effect flag (second special mode flag) corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set at this time, the effect control CPU 101 performs the mode extension determination process (step of FIG. 47). In step S4020 (FIG. 61), a process (step S4063) is executed, in which the background image of variable display to be executed next is set to the first special mode. Thus, the first special mode flag corresponding to the first hold display 1 of the effect flag table is set. In the next variable display to be executed, the 15R normal big hit is performed as described above, and thus the process of setting the background image as the first special mode (step S4063) is executed. In the case of a normal big hit, 5R probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit, the process (step S4063) in which the background image of the variation display to be executed next is set to the first special mode (Y in step S4062A) is avoided. The change effect is not executed at the next fluctuation display, but ends at the fluctuation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the next variable display is started and the hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is shifted. At this time, the first reserved storage number decreases from 1 to 0. Here, the 1st special mode flag corresponding to the change corresponding | compatible display of the effect flag table after an update is set. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the background change effect for displaying the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 in the first special mode (clear sky mode). Here, the fluctuation corresponding display area 180 displays the fluctuation corresponding display of the second special mode (flame effect). In the determination at the time of starting winning, the symbol designation command corresponding to this variation display is symbol 2 designation (15R normal jackpot designation) as described above, and the first special mode flag corresponding to the variation correspondence display in the effect flag table is set. It is in the set state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65 (n), the variable display with the background change effect and the reach effect in the first special mode (sunny mode) is executed, and as shown in FIG. A jackpot symbol (here, “222”) is derived and displayed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the change display related to the end of the background change effect is executed (when the background change effect flag corresponding to the change corresponding display is set), the hold change effect is executed. When the hold change effect is executed, the background change effect is continued for the next variable display to be executed. This prevents only the background change effect from ending when the hold change effect is being executed, and suppresses a decrease in interest.

  Next, a specific example of the specific hold display displayed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of specific hold display. Among these, FIG. 66 (A) shows a specific example of the normal specific hold display. FIG. 66B shows a specific example of the prefetch specific hold display.

  When it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect and the normal specific hold display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the hold display is displayed in a white triangular display inside a white round display. The specific hold display is displayed in such a manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the operation display is performed in such a manner that it rotates once counterclockwise at a cycle of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the hold notice effect and the pre-read specific hold display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the hold display is displayed in a red triangle inside a white round display. The specific hold display is displayed in the manner of displaying in. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the operation display is performed in such a manner as to rotate once counterclockwise at a cycle of 1 second.

  In this embodiment, as a specific example of the normal specific hold display and the prefetch specific hold display, as shown in FIG. 66, the hold display has the same shape and different display colors (in this example, the specific hold display is being displayed). However, the display colors are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, the normal specific hold display and the prefetch specific hold display may have different hold display shapes (for example, a round display and a rectangular display). In addition, for example, the normal specific hold display and the prefetch specific hold display may have different operation display modes (for example, rotating operation and swinging operation). Thus, what is necessary is just to be able to recognize that it is a specific hold display different from the hold display in the normal mode and to recognize that it is a different type in the specific hold display.

  Next, the display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in this embodiment will be described. 67 and 68 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of display modes of appearance effects and specific hold display. Among these, FIG. 67 shows a specific example of the display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the probability variation state (high probability / high base state). FIG. 68 shows a specific example of a display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the time-short state (low probability / high base state). 67 and 68, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, a display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when two specific hold displays (in FIG. 67, normal specific hold display) are displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b, It is assumed that a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has newly occurred. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 67B, the operation positions of the two specific hold displays being displayed are not the predetermined reference operation positions (in this example, one of the triangles of the triangle display during the specific hold display). Since the vertex is not in the upward direction) (see N in step S6015), the appearance effect is not immediately started, and the start of the appearance effect is awaited.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67C, the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed becomes a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangle display during the specific hold display is directed upward. (Refer to Y of step S6028), the execution of the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started (see step S6030), and is synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already being executed. While displaying the hold display, the appearance effect is executed in such a manner that the density gradually changes from a low density state to a high density state.

  Then, when the effect period of the appearance effect ends (see Y in step S6041) and the hold display is displayed at the maximum density, the appearance effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67 (D). The display of the specific hold display is started at the position (see step S6056).

  The display in the mode as shown in FIG. 67 is performed, and the display gradually changes from the light density state to the dark state while displaying the hold display in synchronization with the operation display of the specific hold display already being executed. The effect that the specific hold display is displayed in such a manner is executed, and the operation display of the new specific hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed from the execution of the appearance effect. The effect is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the short time state (low probability / high base state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), when two specific hold displays (in FIG. 68, normal specific hold display) are displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b, It is assumed that a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has newly occurred. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (B), the execution of the appearance effect without the operation display of the hold display is started (see step S6006), and the hold display without the operation display gradually increases from the low density to the density. The appearance effect is executed in such a manner that the state changes to a dark state.

  Next, the effect period of the appearance effect is ended (see Y in step S6041), and as shown in FIG. 68 (C), when the hold display is displayed at the maximum density, it is shown in FIG. 68 (C). At the timing, the operation positions of the two specific hold displays being displayed are not the predetermined reference operation positions (in this example, one of the triangles of the triangle display during the specific hold display is not in the upward direction) ) (See N in step S6045), the display of the specific hold display is not immediately started, and the display of the specific hold display is awaited.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68D, the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed becomes a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangle display during the specific hold display is directed upward. When it is in a state of facing (see Y of step S6060), the display of the specific hold display is started (see step S6062), and the operation display of the hold display is started.

  The display of the mode shown in FIG. 68 is performed, so that the density of the hold display without the operation display gradually changes from the light state to the dark state, and the specific hold display is displayed after changing to the maximum density. An effect that the operation display is started is executed, and after the appearance effect is executed, an effect that the operation display of the new specific hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed is performed. Executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the case where only the normal specific hold display is displayed as the specific hold display is shown. However, when the prefetch specific hold display is displayed, a part or all of the normal specific display is displayed. Just by replacing the hold display with the pre-read specific hold display, the appearance effect and the specific hold display are displayed in the same display mode.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, when an appearance effect or a specific hold display is displayed, after waiting until it becomes a timing that can be synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. Although the case where the appearance effect or the specific hold display is displayed in the mode of starting the operation display is shown, for example, the hold is digested at that timing, the hold display is shifted, and the specific hold display being displayed is deleted. In some cases, the appearance effect may be started or the display of the specific hold display may be started in an aspect accompanied by the operation display without waiting for the timing of synchronization.

  In addition, when a so-called blackout effect is performed in such a manner that the display screen of the effect display device 9 becomes completely dark, and the hold display may disappear from the screen, synchronization is achieved. Without waiting until the timing, the appearance effect may be started or the display of the specific hold display may be started in the form accompanied by the operation display after the end of the blackout effect. In this case, for example, after the blackout effect is finished, all the specific hold displays may be displayed in synchronization with the operation display of all the specific hold displays by redoing the operation display from a predetermined reference operation position. .

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operation display itself is not started until the synchronization is achieved (in this example, the timing when the predetermined reference operation position is reached), and the synchronization is achieved. The case where the operation mode of the specific hold display is displayed in synchronization by starting the operation display at the timing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, regardless of whether or not the timing can be synchronized, for example, The display of the specific hold display accompanied by the operation display may be started from the timing of starting winning. Then, for example, when the new specific hold display is displayed at an operation speed different from that of the already displayed specific hold display, the timing at which the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed is caught up or caught up From this, the operation speed of the specific hold display is synchronized and displayed by changing to the same operation speed as the specific hold display already displayed (this timing may be during execution of the appearance effect or after execution). May be. In addition, for example, a new specific hold display is displayed in operation while being out of synchronization with the already displayed specific hold display, and the new specific hold display is displayed at a specific timing (for example, the shift timing of the hold display). The operation display may be synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, at least the specific effect (in this example) associated with the display of the hold display after the game ball has passed through the start area (in this example, the second start winning opening 14). , Appearance effect). In addition, as a hold display in a predetermined game state (in this example, a probability change state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)), a specific hold display (book) In the example, the specific hold display shown in FIG. 66 can be displayed. Then, when the new specific hold display is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the start area during the display of the specific hold display, the specific display being displayed is being performed during the execution of the specific effect or after the execution of the specific effect. The operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the hold display. For this reason, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, it is possible to ensure the appearance of the hold display when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable. That is, when a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed at the same time, if the operation display of these specific hold displays is not uniform, the hold display does not look good, and the effect of using the specific hold display is reduced. However, in this embodiment, the appearance of the hold display is secured by synchronizing the operation display of the specific hold display, and the production effect using the specific hold display is reduced. Is preventing.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, in a predetermined production mode (in this example, a probability variation production mode (production mode for displaying a background screen with a red background color), a time reduction production mode (displaying a background screen with a green background color) In the production mode)), it is possible to display a specific hold display (in this example, a specific hold display shown in FIG. 66) that displays an operation at a predetermined cycle. Then, when the new specific hold display is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the start area during the display of the specific hold display, the specific display being displayed is being performed during the execution of the specific effect or after the execution of the specific effect. The operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the hold display. For this reason, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, it is possible to ensure the appearance of the hold display when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the specific hold display (in this example, the prefetch specific hold display shown in FIG. 66B) that displays the operation at a predetermined cycle as the hold notice effect. . Then, when the new specific hold display is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the start area during the display of the specific hold display, the specific display being displayed is being performed during the execution of the specific effect or after the execution of the specific effect. The operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the hold display. For this reason, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, it is possible to ensure the appearance of the hold display when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the specific hold display, the first specific hold display (in this example, the normal specific hold display shown in FIG. 66 (A)) and the first specific hold display have display modes. Different second specific hold displays (in this example, the pre-read specific hold display shown in FIG. 66B) can be displayed simultaneously. Then, the operation display of the first specific hold display and the operation display of the second specific hold display are synchronized. Therefore, since the operation display of the specific hold display having a different display mode is also synchronized, the appearance of the hold display can be ensured when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)), or a predetermined performance mode (present In the example, in the case of the probability changing effect mode (the effect mode for displaying the background screen of the red background color) and the time reduction effect mode (the effect mode for displaying the background screen of the green background color)) Although the case where the specific hold display is displayed is shown, it is not always necessary to display the specific hold display for all the hold memories, and the specific hold display may be displayed only for some hold memories. Good. For example, when a new starting prize occurs when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state) or a short time state (low probability / high base state), a specific hold display is made by a lottery process using random numbers. If it is determined that the specific hold display is to be displayed, the specific hold display is displayed with an appearance effect, and if it is determined not to be the specific hold display, the normal mode hold display is displayed. May be. Even if the specific hold display and the normal hold display are mixed and displayed, when multiple specific hold displays are displayed at least in part, the operation display of these specific hold displays As long as they are displayed synchronously.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)), or a predetermined performance mode (present In the example, the hold notice effect is executed only in the probability changing effect mode (the effect mode for displaying the background screen with the red background color) and the short time effect mode (the effect mode for displaying the background screen with the green background color). Although the case has been shown, the hold notice effect may be executed even in the normal state (low probability / low base state). In this case, for example, when displaying a hold display in a normal mode without a hold notice effect, a white round display is displayed as the hold display, but in a normal state (low probability / low base state). If it is decided to execute the hold notice effect at a certain time, the hold notice effect may be executed by displaying a red round display as a hold display in the normal mode with the hold notice effect. Anything can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)), or a predetermined performance mode (present In the example, a specific hold display is displayed when the mode is a certain variation production mode (production mode for displaying a background screen with a red background color) or a short-time production mode (production mode for displaying a background screen with a green background color). Although the configuration for displaying the specific hold display as the hold notice effect is shown, it is not always necessary to have all the configurations, and only one configuration may be provided. For example, a specific hold display can be displayed only when in a predetermined gaming state, a specific hold display can be displayed only in a predetermined production mode, or a specific hold display can be displayed only as a hold notice effect. May be configured to be displayable.

  Further, in this embodiment, the configuration in which the operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed from the execution of the appearance effect, and the specific hold being displayed after the execution of the appearance effect is performed. Although the configuration in which the operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the display is shown, both of the configurations are not necessarily provided, and only one of the configurations may be provided. For example, from the execution of the appearance effect, it may be configured to have only a configuration for synchronizing the operation display of the new specific hold display with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. Only the configuration for synchronizing the operation display of the new specific hold display with the operation display of the specific hold display may be provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the probability change state (high probability / high base state: probability change effect mode), a new specific hold display is displayed in the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed from the execution of the appearance effect. When the action display is synchronized, and the state is in the short time state (low probability / high base state: short time effect mode), after the appearance effect is executed, the operation of the new specific hold display is added to the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. Although the case where it is configured to synchronize the display is shown, conversely, when it is in the short-time state (low probability / high base state: short-time effect mode), from the execution of the appearance effect, the specific pending display being displayed The operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display, and when the probability change state (high probability / high base state: probability change effect mode), the operation of the specific hold display being displayed after the appearance effect is executed New to display It may be configured to synchronize the operation display of specific hold display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the predetermined gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state) or a short time state (low probability / high base state) is shown, but what is shown in this embodiment It cannot be caught. For example, a specific hold display may be displayed when the predetermined gaming state is a high probability / low base state, or a specific hold display may be displayed when the predetermined game state is a low probability / low base state. You may comprise.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect mode is the probability change effect mode or the short-time effect mode is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. You may comprise so that a hold display may be displayed. In addition, in a gaming machine capable of transitioning to a so-called probability variation latency mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not it is controlled to a probability variation state, a specific hold display is displayed when it is in the probability variation latency mode. Also good. Also, for example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a mission effect (for example, an effect that presents an achievement condition such as “Let's reach within 5 minutes!”) By shifting to a so-called mission mode. A specific hold display may be displayed on the screen. Also, for example, regardless of the gaming state, the production mode is changed based on the fact that a predetermined time has been reached or a lottery process has been won (for example, the predetermined time has been reached or the lottery has been selected) In a game machine configured to change to a background screen of a mountain landscape or a background screen of a sea landscape based on winning of processing, a specific hold display is displayed in a specific production mode You may comprise. As such, the predetermined effect mode may be any mode that can recognize any mode change over at least a plurality of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, after performing the appearance effect, when performing control to synchronize the operation display of the new specific hold display with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed, During the period until the operation display of the display is started, the hold display of the still image is displayed, and the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed is switched from the start of the next cycle of the operation display to the hold display of the moving image. The operation display of the new specific hold display may be synchronized.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the appearance effect is performed, the operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed, as shown in this embodiment. Various timings are conceivable, not only when the timing can be synchronized (in this example, the timing at which a predetermined reference motion position is reached). For example, the operation display of the new specific hold display may be synchronized at the timing of shifting the next hold display after the appearance effect is finished. In addition, for example, in the case where the hold display is deleted during execution of a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect or a so-called blackout effect, after execution of a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect or a blackout effect. The operation display of the new specific hold display may be synchronized with the timing of restarting the hold display. Further, the control for synchronizing the operation display of the specific hold display at the timing of the shift of the hold display, the super-reach effect, or the restart of the hold display after the execution of the blackout effect is performed during execution or execution of the appearance effect shown in FIG. It may be executed instead of the control to be synchronized later, or may be executed in addition to the control to be synchronized during or after the appearance effect shown in FIG.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
Next, the differences between the first embodiment and the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, as described in the pre-reading effect determination process of FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 101 executes the background change effect determination process (step S1009) at the time of winning a start, and executes the background change effect. (Step S1050 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the execution of the background change effect is determined not at the time of starting winning a prize but at the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation display. Thereby, compared with 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment has a difference about the prefetch effect determination process at the time of start winning, and an effect design change start process. In the first embodiment, the execution ratio of the background change effect is changed according to the winning determination result (the contents of the symbol designation command). However, in the second embodiment, the execution ratio of the background change effect is described later. Is not directly changed by the winning determination result (design designation command). Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76, the second embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect determination process (step S800B) of the effect control process process (FIG. 31) in the second embodiment, corresponding to the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. It is. The difference from the pre-reading effect determination process of the first embodiment is that when only the pending change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (N in step S1006), the effect control CPU 101 performs a process related to the determination of the background change effect. The point is that the pre-reading effect determination process is terminated without performing (that is, the process of step S1008 and step S1009 is not performed). In other words, when it is determined that only the hold change effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to a newly received command at the time of starting winning a normal mode that is not a special mode. Is executed (step S1020), and the pre-reading effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process (step S1005) of the above-described prefetch effect determining process in the second embodiment, and corresponds to the winning determination process (FIG. 41) of the first embodiment. . The difference from the winning determination process of the first embodiment is that the process for the background change effect is not included.

  In the winning determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first (1) determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect and (2) executes the hold change effect based on the winning determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1020A). This process will be specifically described below.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 confirms a symbol designation command. When the symbol designating command is C400 (H), it is determined that the winning determination result is “out of place”, so the effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode to 5%, The determination process for the hold change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the hold change effect of 2 special modes is 1% and the ratio of not executing the hold change effect is 94%.

  When the symbol designation command is C401 (H) to C405 (H), the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the first special mode is 10%, the execution ratio of the hold change effect in the second special mode is 20%, and the hold change The determination process for the pending change effect is executed so that the ratio of the effect not being executed is 70%.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change effect of the second special mode is set to be a big hit more than the hold change effect of the first special mode, and the hold change effect of the second special mode is more set. It can be said that the reliability is higher than the hold change effect of the first special mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is decided to execute the hold change effect (step S1021A). When it is not decided to execute the hold change effect (N in Step S1021A), the effect control CPU 101 displays the new hold display on the first hold memory display unit 9a or the second hold memory display unit 9b in the normal mode. (Step S1033A) and the winning time determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the hold change effect (Y in step S1021A), the current hold memory number (first hold memory number addition designation command or second hold memory number addition designation command is received in the effect flag table. The production control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the production mode in correspondence with the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number after the addition update based on the fact (step S1022A). Then, the production control CPU 101 displays the new hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b in either the determined first special mode or the second special mode ( Step S1033A), the winning time determination process is terminated. The above is the prefetching effect determination process of this embodiment.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) of the effect control process (FIG. 31) in the second embodiment, corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 43) of the first embodiment. Is. The difference from the prefetching effect determination process of the first embodiment is that a variation start time determination process (step S8003A) is included immediately before the process table selection process (step S8004), and the process table selection process (step S8004). The content is changed, and the other points are the same as in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the variation start time determination process (step S8003A) is added as compared to the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the background change effect is not the start winning prize but the variation start timing. This is because it is determined whether or not to perform and the effect mode in the case of executing the background change effect.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the change start time determination process (step S8003A) in the second embodiment. In this process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the background change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (step S2020). If the background change effect flag has already been set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2020), the effect control CPU 101 ends the variation start time determination process because the background change effect flag is not set again. On the other hand, when the background change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2020), the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of reserved memories before subtraction (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number). Is confirmed to be 3 or more (step S2021). Here, in this embodiment, the number of reserved storages before subtraction is used as a reference. In this embodiment, prior to the change start time determination process, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is received. On the other hand, the pending storage number subtraction process is executed, while the variation start time determination process is executed at a timing when the effect flag table is not shifted as shown in FIG. 72 (a timing before the execution of step S2015). Because. In other words, it is because the determination about the execution of the background change effect is made with reference to the number of reserved memories before the subtraction of the number of reserved memories accompanying the start of the change in the effect design. This condition can be replaced with a condition that the number of reserved storage after subtraction is 2 or more. If the shift of the effect flag table (step S2015) is executed before the change start time determination process is executed, the number of reserved memories after subtraction (that is, the current number of reserved memories). Based on

  Here, when the number of reserved memories before subtraction is not 3 or more (N in step S2021), that is, when it is less than 3, the effect control CPU 101 ends the variation start time determination process. On the other hand, if the number of stored storage before subtraction is 3 or more (Y in step S2021), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the hold change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (step S2022). Here, when the hold change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2022), the hold change effect flag is set in the effect flag table based on the first change start time determination table (step S2023). If it is set (Y in step S2022), based on the second change start time determination table (step S2024), the effect control CPU 101 (1) determines whether or not to execute the background change effect, and ( 2) When executing the background change effect, the effect mode is determined.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a first change start determination table according to the second embodiment. As described above, when the pending change effect flag is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2022), this first change start determination table is used. The effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 4% and the second special mode regardless of the contents specified by the command at the time of starting winning such as the symbol designation command or the display result designation command. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution rate of the background change effect is 4% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 92%.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a second variation start determination table according to the second embodiment. As described above, when the pending change effect flag is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2022), the second variation start time determination table is used. The effect control CPU 101 sets the execution ratio of the background change effect in the first special mode to 10% and the second special mode in the second special mode regardless of the contents specified by the command at the time of starting winning such as the symbol designation command or the display result designation command. The determination process for the background change effect is executed so that the execution ratio of the background change effect is 10% and the ratio of not executing the background change effect is 80%.

  Thus, when the hold change effect is being executed, the second variation start time determination table is used, which is higher than the first change start time determination table used when the hold change effect is not being executed. Since it is decided to execute the background change effect at a rate, the rate at which both the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed in parallel is increased, and the player's interest can be preferably improved. It becomes possible.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the execution of the background change effect is determined regardless of the winning determination result or the display result of the variable display to be executed. However, as described above, the execution ratio of the background change effect is changed depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed (see FIGS. 74 and 75), and is set in the effect flag table as described below. Depending on the contents of the flag, the execution of the background change effect may be canceled. Therefore, the execution ratio of the background change effect does not change directly depending on the winning determination result, but it can be said that it is indirectly influenced.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a process table selection process (step S8004) in the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 72) of the second embodiment. The process table selection process of the second embodiment is different from the process table selection process (FIG. 58) of the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2051 to S2053, S2060, and step S2061 are increased. Steps S2054 and S2062 to S2065 are the same as steps S2045 and S2040 to S2043 of the process table selection process (FIG. 58) of the first embodiment. The process table selection process of the second embodiment will be specifically described below.

  Regarding this process table selection processing, (1) when the background change effect in the first special mode (clear sky mode) is to be executed as a continuous effect, the display result of the change display to start change is other than 15R jackpot If it is a big hit, the execution of the background change effect in the first special mode is canceled, and (2) the change starts when the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is to be executed as a continuous effect. If the display result of the variable display to be displayed is a big hit other than the probable big hit, the execution of the background change effect in the second special mode is canceled, and (3) if none of the above applies, the first implementation As with the embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls to select a process table according to the state of the change pattern and the background change effect flag in the effect flag table. That. That is, it can be said that the first special mode (sunny mode) suggests a 15R jackpot, and the second special mode (lightning strike mode) suggests a promiscuous jackpot.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a jackpot designation (display results 2 to 6 designation) (step S2051). If the big hit is not specified (N in step S2051), the process proceeds to step S2062. On the other hand, if the jackpot is designated (Y in step S2051), it is confirmed whether or not the 15R jackpot is designated (display result 2 designation or display result 4 designation). If 15R big hit is designated (Y in step S2052), the process proceeds to step S2060. On the other hand, if the 15R big hit is not designated (N in step S2052), it is confirmed whether or not the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is set in the effect flag table (step S2053). If the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2053), the process proceeds to step S2060.

  On the other hand, when the 1st special mode flag corresponding to other than a change corresponding display is set in the production flag table (Y in Step S2053), the first change display is a big hit other than 15R. Since the background change effect of one special mode (clear sky mode) is about to be executed, the set first special mode flag is reset (step S2054), and the change does not become the background image of the first special mode. A process table corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thus, in the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode, it is limited so as not to be a big hit other than 15R, and the variation accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode. If the display is a big hit, the 15R big hit will be confirmed.

  In step S2060, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a probable big hit designation (display results 4 to 6 designation). If the probability variation big hit is specified (Y in step S2060), the process proceeds to step S2062. On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation big hit designation (N in step S2060), it is confirmed whether or not the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation display is set in the effect flag table (step S2061). If the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the change display is not set in the effect flag table (N in step S2061), the process proceeds to step S2062.

  On the other hand, when the second special mode flag corresponding to the display other than the fluctuation corresponding display is set in the effect flag table (Y in step S2061), the second special is displayed even though the fluctuation display to be started usually results in a big hit. Since the background change effect of the mode (lightning strike mode) is about to be executed, the set second special mode flag is reset (step S2054), and the variation pattern does not become the background image of the second special mode. A corresponding process table is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the variation display accompanied with the background change effect in the second special mode, the restriction is made so as not to become the normal big hit, and in the variation display accompanied with the background change effect in the second special mode. If it is a big hit, the probability variation big hit will be fixed.

  In step S2062, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first special mode flag corresponding to the display other than the change correspondence display in the effect flag table is set (step S2062). When the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display of the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2062), the CPU 101 for effect control has a process corresponding to the change pattern and the background change effect of the first special mode. A table is selected (step S2063), and the process table selection process is terminated. Thereby, the background image of a production | presentation symbol becomes a 1st special mode (mode of a fine weather mode) in the variable display performed.

  When the first special mode flag corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2062), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second special corresponding to other than the change corresponding display in the effect flag table. It is confirmed whether the mode flag is set (step S2064). When the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation corresponding display in the effect flag table is set (Y in step S2064), the effect control CPU 101 performs a process according to the variation pattern and the background change effect of the second special mode. A table is selected (step S2065), and the process table selection process is terminated. As a result, the background image of the effect symbol becomes the second special mode (the mode of the lightning strike mode) in the executed variable display.

  When the second special mode flag corresponding to other than the variation corresponding display of the effect flag table is not set (N in step S2064), the effect control CPU 101 uses the process table corresponding to the variation pattern that does not become the background image of the special mode. Is selected (step S2055), and the process table selection process is terminated.

  Thus, unlike the first embodiment, the continuous effect in the second embodiment is not a pre-read effect determined based on the command at the time of starting winning a prize. The control for ending the background change effect of the second special mode is performed, and the control for ending the background change effect of the second special mode is performed in the case of a big hit. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, as a result, in the case of a big win in the variable display with the background change effect of the first special mode, the 15R big hit is fixed, and the change with the background change effect of the second special mode is determined. If the display is a big hit, the probability variation big hit is fixed. Thereby, the player comes to expect that a big hit will be generated in the variable display accompanied by the background change effect, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the background image and improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is determined in the start winning prize, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined that it is out of place, and the display result in the determination at the start of the variation. When is a big hit, the background change effect of the first special mode is executed only when it is determined that the 15R big hit. That is, it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the 15R big hit is caused by the background image. Therefore, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the big win is determined in the start winning prize, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is determined that it is out of place, and the display result in the determination at the start of the variation. Is a big hit, the background change effect of the second special mode is executed only when it is determined to be a promising big hit. That is, since it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is generated by the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to suggest whether or not the big hit is likely to be caused by the background image, both the display mode of the hold display and the background image Can effectively enhance the player's expectation and further enhance the interest.

  In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the background change effect is not a look-ahead effect, and whether or not the background change effect is executed by confirming a symbol designation command or the like at the time of starting winning, The process of determining the effect mode when executing is eliminated. Therefore, the background change effect can be realized by simpler processing, and the control burden can be reduced.

  Finally, an embodiment different from the above embodiment is illustrated.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of the start winning prize, the background image is displayed in a special mode from the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display after the start winning prize) to be executed next. The example of changing to the first special mode or the second special mode) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the background image may be changed to a special mode from the change display executed later (change display after the first winning prize). Further, the background image may be changed to a special mode from the first variation display after the start winning prize, or the background image may be changed to a special mode from the second or subsequent variation display after the start winning prize. For example, it is preferable to determine at which timing the background image is changed to a special mode based on a random number. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the variable display that is the target of the background change effect, and the gameability can be improved.

  Further, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the background image may be changed to a special mode in the variable display executed at the time of starting winning. That is, the background image may be changed to a special mode in the middle of the variable display that was being executed at the start winning timing. According to this, the interest at the time of starting winning a prize can be improved.

  In the first embodiment described above, when neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning (step S1005 in FIG. 40), as shown in step S1020 in FIG. 41 and FIG. In addition, the example in which only one of the hold change effect and the background change effect can be executed with the variable display corresponding to the start winning as a target has been described, but not limited to this, the variable display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. You may be made to be able to perform both a pending | holding change effect and a background change effect as a target. For example, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the manner in which it is executed and whether to execute the background change effect and the manner in which it is executed may be determined independently. Then, with the target variable display at the start winning prize as the target, only the hold change effect or the background change effect may be executed, or both the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed. You may be allowed to do so. In other words, both the on-hold change effect and the background change effect may be executable with a common variable display as a target.

  For example, in the process corresponding to step S1020 in FIG. 41, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and whether to execute the background change effect and whether to execute the background change effect are independent of each other. It is preferable to move to step S1025 after the process of step S1023. According to this, there is a case where only the hold change effect is executed or only the background change effect is executed by targeting the variable display which is the determination target at the start winning prize, or the hold change effect and the background change. In some cases, both effects can be executed. Further, in place of the process of step S1033, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the hold change effect. If it is decided not to execute the hold change effect, a new hold display is usually displayed. When it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the new hold display may be displayed in the determined special mode (first special mode or second special mode). .

  In the first embodiment, the example of determining whether or not to execute the background change effect with the variable display corresponding to the start winning as a target in the determination at the time of starting winning is described. Not limited to this, at the time of start winning, whether or not to execute the background change effect with the change display executed before the change display corresponding to the start winning is determined, and the mode for executing the background change effect are determined. Also good. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the variable display that is the target of the background change effect, and the gameability can be improved.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 47, even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is out of place, the first special mode (clear sky mode) and the second special mode ( The example of determining to execute the background change effect in the lightning strike mode has been described. However, when the determination result at the time of the start winning prize is out of place, the ratio of executing the background change effect is further different according to the variable category command. You may make it let. For example, when the variation pattern type specified by the variation category command is super-reaching deviation (variation category 4), the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of non-reach deviation (variation category 1). Also good.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) (Y in step S1026, Y in step S1052) and the determination result is a big hit other than 15R Is (Y in step S1027, Y in step S1054), the background change effect of the first special mode is terminated with the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination (steps S1208, S1055). As described above, the background change effect may be ended by the change display two or three times before the change display that is the object of the determination. In addition, it is determined not to execute the background change effect of the first special mode (sunny mode) and the background change effect of the first special mode (sunny mode) is executed, not only when the determination result is a big hit other than 15R. Even when the determination result is determined and the determination result is out of place, the background change effect may be ended with a variation display before the variation display that is the object of the determination at a predetermined ratio.

  In the first embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the background change effect in the second special mode (lightning strike mode) (N in step S1026, N in step S1052) and the determination result is a normal jackpot ( Y in step S1030, Y in step S1057), the background change effect in the second special mode is ended with the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination (steps S1031, S1058). However, the background change effect may be ended with the change display two or three times before the change display that is the object of the determination. In addition, it is decided not to perform the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) and the determination result is usually a big hit, but to execute the background change effect of the second special mode (clear sky mode) Even when the determination result is out of the range, the background change effect may be ended with a variation display before the variation display subjected to the determination at a predetermined rate.

  In the second embodiment, the example in which the flag corresponding to the effect mode of the background change effect is set (step S2026) in association with the reserved storage number before subtraction in the variation start time determination process of FIG. 73 has been described. According to this, the background change effect is executed for the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the reserved storage number before subtraction including the variable display related to the change start time determination process. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the background change effect may be executed for a variable display that exceeds the number of reserved memories before subtraction. For example, in step S2026, the first special mode flag or the second special mode flag that is not related to the number of reserved memories is set, and the period in which the first special mode flag or the second special mode flag is set is The process table may be selected so that the background image is in the first special mode or the second special mode.

  Here, for example, the timing at which the first special mode flag is reset is (1) a big hit other than 15R (a big hit of 5R or less in the above embodiment), and (2) a 15R big hit. The timing when the display result is derived and displayed, and the timing when the display result is derived and displayed by executing the variation display of the variation pattern with reach (normal reach or super reach) is preferable. . As a result, regardless of the number of stored memories when the background change effect is executed, (2) the fluctuation that becomes 15R jackpot until the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit other than 15R ends. The background change effect continues until the display ends or until (3) the variable display in which the display mode becomes the specific display mode (reach state) ends. As a result, for the player, if the background change effect is executed, the player will have the impression that the big hit or reach will be confirmed regardless of the number of reserved memories at that time. It is possible to improve the interest of the background change effect that is executed regardless of the determination of the display result.

  Here, for example, the timing at which the second special mode flag is reset is (1) the timing before the start of the fluctuation display that is a normal big hit, and (2) the fluctuation display that is a probable big hit is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. And (3) the timing at which the display of the variation result with the reach (normal reach or super reach) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. As a result, regardless of the number of reserved memories when the background change effect is executed, (2) the fluctuation display that becomes the probable variation big hit is (2) until the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that becomes the normal big hit ends. The background change effect is continued until the end or until (3) the variable display in which the display mode becomes the specific display mode (reach state) ends. As a result, for the player, if the background change effect is executed, the player will have the impression that the big hit or reach will be confirmed regardless of the number of reserved memories at that time. It is possible to improve the interest of the background change effect that is executed regardless of the determination of the display result.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the background change effect of the first special mode is performed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) is executed. You may make it complete | finish. Further, in the second embodiment, the background change effect of the second special mode is performed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the change display accompanied with the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed. You may make it complete | finish.

  In the second embodiment described above, as illustrated in step S8003A in FIG. 72, the example of determining whether or not to execute the background change effect at the timing of starting the change display of the effect symbol has been described. As in the first embodiment, the background change effect is applied to the variation display (including the variation display corresponding to the start prize) until the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed at the timing of the start prize. It may be determined whether or not to execute.

  In the above embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the pending change effect and the execution mode (first special mode (heat character mode) or second special mode (flame effect)) are suggested, and the background change effect is executed. Although the example which suggests a big hit type by presence / absence and execution mode (the 1st special mode (clear sky mode) and the 2nd special mode (lightning mode)) was explained, it is not restricted to such a form, The jackpot type may be suggested by the execution mode, and the possibility of jackpot may be suggested by the presence / absence of execution of the background change effect and the execution mode. For example, in the case of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the first special mode, the 15R big hit is at a higher rate than the case of the big display in the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the normal mode or the second special mode. It is good to be. In addition, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the second special mode is a big hit, the probability change big hit is at a higher rate than the case of the big display in the variable display corresponding to the normal mode or the hold display of the first special mode. It is good to be. On the other hand, for example, the variable display with the background change effect in the first special mode becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the variable display without the background change effect, and the variable display with the background change effect in the second special mode is It is good to make it a big hit at a higher rate than the variable display accompanied by the background change effect of the first special mode.

  In this way, it may be suggested whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol) by the continuous effect (for example, the background change effect) executed along with the plurality of variable displays, When the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display becomes the specific display result by changing the display mode of the hold display to a special mode (for example, the first special mode or the second special mode) different from the normal mode, It may be suggested whether or not to be controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, (1) It is determined whether or not a specific display result is obtained before determination by the start time determination means (before the start of variable display corresponding to the effective start winning) (change corresponding to the effective start winning at the time of effective starting winning) In addition to determining whether or not the display is a big hit (steps S220 to S222 in FIG. 22), and (2) if it is determined that a specific display result is obtained, the first specific gaming state (a big hit of 5R or less, a normal big hit) ) Or the second specific gaming state (15R big hit, probable big hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state is further determined (judgment type determination (step S229 in FIG. 22)) (2) Corresponding to the hold information subject to the determination based on (2) the determination of whether to control the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state The display mode of the hold specific information that may be performed the display mode control to a special embodiment. And when performing such display mode control, you may make it perform a continuous production based on determination whether it becomes the specific display result at the time of the start winning shown by (1), You may make it perform a continuous production irrespective of determination of whether it becomes such a specific display result.

  It is good also as a structure which combined said 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. Specifically, there is a case where the background change effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning a prize as in the first embodiment, and there is a background change regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning a prize as in the second embodiment. There may also be cases where the production is performed. According to this, when the background change effect is executed, the player cannot grasp whether or not the background change effect is based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, and the interest is enhanced. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 42 and the like, an example in which the execution ratio of the hold change effect is determined regardless of the hold memory number is described. Accordingly, the execution ratio of the hold change effect may be varied. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the rate at which the pending change effect is executed may be increased.

  In the above embodiment, “performing a predetermined process in one case at a higher rate than the other case” includes executing the predetermined process only in one case and performing the predetermined process in the other case. Includes not performing. For example, in the above embodiment, when the background change effect is being executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the hold change effect is executed at a higher rate than when the background change effect is not being executed. As explained above, executing the hold change effect at this “high ratio” makes it possible to execute the hold change effect only when the background change effect is being executed, and holds when the background change effect is not being executed. This includes the case where the change effect is not executed. Further, for example, in the above embodiment, in the determination at the time of starting winning, when the hold change effect is executed, the background change effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold change effect is not executed. Although an example has been described, executing a background change effect at this “high rate” only allows a background change effect to be executed when the hold change effect is being executed, and when the hold change effect is not being executed. Includes the case where the background change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the background change effect is not executed at a predetermined rate even when 15R big hit is described, but the background change effect is always executed when 15R big hit. You may make it do. In the above embodiment, an example in which the background change effect is not executed at a predetermined rate even when the probability change big hit is described, but the background change effect is always executed when the probability change big hit is achieved. May be. Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display determined as the target of the background change effect at the time of the start winning is finished, the hold display corresponding to the variable display executed subsequently is displayed in a special manner. However, the example of continuing the background change effect has been described, but when the variable display determined to be the target of the background change effect at the time of winning the start is finished, the hold display corresponding to the variable display executed afterwards is a special mode. Even when the display is not displayed, the background change effect is continued at a predetermined rate, and when the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be executed subsequently is displayed in a special manner, The background change effect may be continued at a high rate.

  Similarly to the above, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect of the first special mode (clear sky mode) is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, and when it is determined that the jackpot is other than 15R. Explained the example of ending the background change effect of the first special mode with the variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, but not limited to this, it was determined that the big hit other than 15R Even in this case, the background change effect of the first special mode may be executed in the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and the execution ratio is lower than the case where it is determined that 15R big hit. It is good to be. Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode) is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning, and it is determined that the normal big hit, the starting winning is concerned. Although the example of ending the background change effect of the second special mode with the variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the above has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined that the normal big hit, the start winning There is a possibility that the background change effect of the second special mode may be executed in the variable display corresponding to, and the execution ratio may be set lower than when it is determined that the probability change big hit.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, the first special mode flag corresponding to after the variable display is set in the determination when starting the variable display (the first special mode (clear sky mode)). When the display result of the variable display is determined to be a big hit other than 15R, the background change effect of the first special mode associated with the variable display is not executed. Although the example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined that the jackpot is other than 15R, the background change effect of the first special mode may be executed in the variable display, and the execution It is preferable that the ratio be lower than when it is determined that 15R is a big hit. In the second embodiment, the second special mode flag corresponding to the subsequent display of the variable display is set in the determination when starting the variable display (the background change effect of the second special mode (lightning strike mode)). However, when the display result of the variation display is determined to be a big jackpot, the background change effect of the second special mode associated with the variation display is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the display result of the variable display is determined to be a normal jackpot, the background change effect of the second special mode may be executed in the variable display. It is preferable that the ratio be lower than when it is determined that the probability variation big hit.

  In the embodiment described above, the example in which the continuous effect accompanying the continuous variation display is the background change effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. An effect design aspect change effect that changes the display pattern of the effect symbol to a specific mode (for example, a specific character or character), or (2) a specific symbol that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is not a big hit symbol over a plurality of continuous variable displays The chance eye continuous stop effect that is a combination of performance symbols (for example, “112”, “123”, etc. (so-called “chance eyes”)), or (3) A countdown performance that displays the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display becomes (for example, “3 remaining”, “2 remaining”, “1 remaining”, “0 remaining”, etc.) Or, it may be (4) As the character object operation effect that a movable member provided on the periphery of the effect display device 9 for changing display of multiple successive (so-called "character object") is operated, is performed.

  In the above embodiment, when the number of reserved memories at the time of starting winning is 3 or more (first embodiment), or when the number of reserved memories before subtraction at the start of variation of the production symbol is 3 or more (second implementation) However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the number of reserved memories at the time of starting winning a prize is 2 or more (first embodiment), or when the variation of the effect symbol starts. What is necessary is just to be performed with the continuous variable display of multiple times, such as when the number of reserved memories before subtraction is 2 or more (second embodiment).

  In the above embodiment, two types of jackpot types of 5R or less and 15R jackpot, and a combination of probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot are illustrated as a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player. Not limited to, for example, a combination in which the period of control to the high base state after the end of the big hit gaming state is different (for example, the big hit in which the high base state is maintained until 30 fluctuation displays are executed and the 100 fluctuation display A jackpot combination that maintains a high base state until executed.

  In the above embodiment, with the control of the big hit gaming state (for example, when the big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol in the effect symbol variation start process (step S8002), or the big hit symbol is stopped in the effect symbol variation stop process) When displayed (Y in step S863) or in the big hit end effect process (step S807), the set background change effect flag may be reset. Further, in the above embodiment, with the control to the big hit game state, referring to the symbol designation command and the variation category command in the start winning command storage area, the variation display executed thereafter is all out of place. If it is determined, the set background change effect flag may be reset. By doing so, the background change effect is executed within a predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit gaming state, but the game is enhanced by the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It is possible to prevent the interest of the background from being lowered and to prevent the interest of the background change effect from being lowered.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, with the control to the big hit gaming state (for example, when the big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol in the production symbol variation start process (step S8002), or the big hit symbol in the production symbol variation stop process) Is stopped (Y in step S863) or in the jackpot end effect process (step S807), the background change effect associated with the variable display related to the jackpot game state is not executed, and the start winning command The background change effect flag that has been set may be reset when it is determined that all of the variation displays executed thereafter are determined to be out of reference with reference to the symbol designation command or variation category command in the storage area. Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is not executed even though it is determined that the big win is determined at the time of starting winning, the big hit gaming state related to the big win ends. Until it is done, it may not be determined that the background change effect is executed in the determination at the time of starting winning. By doing so, the background change effect is executed in the variable display in which the display result executed after that is not executed even though the background change effect is not executed in the variable display in which the display result is a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the background change effect from being impaired.

  In said embodiment, the timing which makes the display mode of a hold display a special mode (a 1st special mode or a 2nd special mode) is a new hold display, the 1st hold memory display part 9a and the 2nd hold memory display part 9b. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the timing at which the display mode of the hold display is set to the special mode may be the timing after the new hold display is displayed. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect in the determination at the time of starting winning, a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b are displayed. The hold display may be changed to a special mode at the timing of shifting the hold display. Here, when a plurality of shifts are executed, a hold display is displayed at a timing according to any one of them (for example, one of the first shift timing, the second shift timing, or the third shift timing). It is better to change to a special mode.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the case where the specific hold display accompanied by the operation display is displayed in addition to the hold display of the normal mode is shown, but the hold display can be changed to a plurality of types of modes at a plurality of timings. At the same time, a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which a hold display can be changed to a plurality of types at a plurality of timings, and a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed. explain.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, instead of the first reserved memory display unit 9a and the second reserved memory display unit 9b shown in the first embodiment, the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is assumed that a total pending storage display unit for displaying the total pending storage number is. The winning determination result storage buffer shown in this embodiment corresponds to the first starting winning command storage area and the second starting winning command storage area (see FIG. 37) shown in the first embodiment. To do. The winning determination result designation command shown in this embodiment corresponds to the symbol designation command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 38, in addition to the hold display control process (see step S800C), a prefetch effect determination process (shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment). A process different from the pre-reading effect determination process). FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing prefetch effect determination processing in the third embodiment. In the prefetch effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a prefetch effect restriction flag indicating that execution of the prefetch effect is restricted is set (step S67101). Note that the prefetch effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 described later. If the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display unit are displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode.

  If the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 displays the past winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result indicated by the winning determination result designation command received this time). (Excluding) are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the extracted winning determination results are all determination results indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, in step S67103, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the extracted winning determination result is a value indicating that all the variation patterns are “shortened non-reach” or “non-reach”. (That is, whether or not there is a deviation fluctuation without reach) is determined.

  If all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 are determination results indicating “non-reach”, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when all of the extracted winning determination results are not determination results indicating “non-reach”, the CPU 101 for effect control displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the combined hold storage display unit in the normal mode. Is displayed (step S67116). In other words, this embodiment is configured not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the newly received winning determination result designation command when there is an on-hold storage in which a variable display with a reach effect is performed. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 77, even when there is a holding storage in which a variable display with a reach effect is performed, the prefetch effect is executed based on the newly received winning determination result designation command. May be.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the latest winning determination result (the winning determination result indicated in the received winning determination result designation command) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the extracted winning is obtained. Based on the time determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 uses the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 78A to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch effect.

  FIG. 78A is an explanatory diagram showing a prefetch effect execution determination table in the third embodiment. In the prefetch effect execution determination table, determination values corresponding to the determination items (“execute prefetch effect” or “do not execute prefetch effect”) are assigned for each determination result at the time of winning, but FIG. 78 (A). In the example shown, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and a decision item (“execute the pre-reading effect” or a decision value assigned to the extracted random number is assigned). “Do not execute pre-reading effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (A), the numerical values corresponding to “execute the prefetch effect” and “do not execute the prefetch effect” in the determination results at the time of winning each prize are “execute the prefetch effect”. Or, the ratio (%) at which “Do not execute pre-reading effect” is selected is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 78A, the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 78B, the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79, and FIG. The prefetch effect change timing determination table shown and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 81 are also actually assigned determination values, but the ratio of the determination values assigned is shown to simplify the description. Yes. Also in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, as in step S67104, the effect control CPU 101, for example, the final display mode, the prefetch effect pattern, the change timing (the number of shifts). ) Or a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect is extracted, and the item to which the determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned is determined.

  Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch effect (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal manner in the combined hold storage display unit. (Step S67116).

  In step S67105a, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total reserved memory number in the effect total reserved memory number counter for specifying the reserved display that is the target of the prefetch effect (step S67105a). The value of the total reserved memory number counter for effects is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the effect symbol variation start process, and in step S1811, it is used to specify the hold display that is the target of the prefetch effect. For example, when the value of the total pending storage number counter for effect for counting the total pending storage number is 4, a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the fourth pending display of the total pending storage display unit is executed. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in the pre-read effect is finally displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided in addition to the normal mode. However, as will be described later, the hold display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined as either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as a special mode.

  FIG. 78 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table in the third embodiment. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 uses the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 78B to determine which display mode is to be used for final display (hereinafter also referred to as the final display mode). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each winning determination result (variable display display result) in the final display mode determination table based on the latest extracted winning determination result.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect effect pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first prefetch effect pattern and a second prefetch effect pattern are provided as prefetch effect patterns. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed once in the special mode. Note that the first look-ahead effect pattern includes a display in which the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) for the advance notice is displayed in the first special mode or the second special form at the timing of the start winning prize, and the change display of the advance notice target. The hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display (hold information) to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at any shift timing until the (hold information) starts. Including. On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed in a special manner at the timing of the start winning prize, and at any shift timing until the advance display of the advance notice subject is changed, The display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram of a prefetch effect pattern determination table in the third embodiment. In step S67107, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of reserved memories. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control is hit by the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small” In the case of “winning”), the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79A is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 converts the prefetch effect pattern into the first prefetch effect pattern and the second prefetch effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total reserved memory number in the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide to either.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hit prefetch effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79B when the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result is “out of”. Then, the effect control CPU 101 converts the look-ahead effect pattern into the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total reserved storage number in the failure-read-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide to either.

  When the prefetch effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) to be notified. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display (hold information) to be notified changes is any hold display shift timing. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the display mode is changed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the noticeable change display. For example, when the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display to be notified.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a change timing determination table according to the third embodiment. In step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display to be notified based on the change timing determination table and the total hold storage number. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control is hit by the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small” If the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first prefetch effect pattern, the first prefetch effect change timing determination table for hit shown in FIG. 80A is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the first prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of hit shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  In addition, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “out of” and the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first prefetch effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 The first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 80 (B) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the first prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of failure shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 wins the display result of the variable display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit” or “small hit”). When the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern, the hit second prefetch effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 80C is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the hit-time second prefetch effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  In addition, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “out of” and the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 The second prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 80 (D) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the second prefetch effect change timing determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning a prize) to 7.

  When the change timing (number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the hold display change timing when the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetch effect pattern (Y in step S67109). An effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed at the shift timing. In addition, the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is determined as either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a suggestion effect mode determination table according to the third embodiment. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 uses the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 81 to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display. Specifically, based on the latest extracted winning determination result, the effect mode is set to the first effect mode or the ratio determined for each winning determination result (variable display display result) in the final display mode determination table. It is determined as one of the second effect modes.

  When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch effect restriction flag indicating that execution of the prefetch effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the prefetch effect restriction flag is set, control is performed so that the prefetch effect is not repeatedly executed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in a special manner, control is performed so as not to newly perform a prefetch effect. Therefore, it is restricted that a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special manner. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special manner, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about which hold display should be noted.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs control so that a new hold display is displayed in a special manner in the total hold storage display unit (step S67112). In step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and also shows information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and the effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating the mode is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the production mode of the suggestive effect are determined in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  If the prefetch effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second prefetch effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if it is determined to be the first prefetch effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S67108. It is confirmed whether or not the determined change timing is at the time of starting winning (step S67113). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the shift counter is 0. Then, if the change timing is at the time of start winning (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the new hold display is displayed in the final display mode determined in step S67107 in the combined hold storage display unit. (Step S67114).

  If the change timing is not at the time of winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in step S67110 described above ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit (step S67116). Also in step S67116 (for example, only when the process proceeds from step S67115), the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display and the final display determined in step S67106 as in step S67112. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the production mode of the suggestive effect are determined in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing effect design variation start processing (step S801) in the third embodiment. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the contents of the winning determination result storage buffer , The first hold display in the combined hold storage display unit is erased, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one, and the combined hold storage number display in the combined hold storage display unit is updated (step S1800). ).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is greater than 0 (step S1801). If the value of the shift counter is greater than 0, it means that it has been decided to execute a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed in the combined hold storage display unit. Show. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the prefetch effect (change the display mode of the hold display).

  If the value of the shift counter is not greater than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, it is determined that the value of the shift counter is 0 and the prefetch effect is executed (the display mode of the hold display is changed). If not, the effect control CPU 101 moves the process to step S1804.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the prefetch effect (change the display mode of the hold display), it is for effect control. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect total storage number counter (step S1802a). The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the shift counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift counter is 0 (step S1803). If the value of the shift counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift counter in step S1802b, it changes the display mode of any of the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit. This indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, if the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, if it is not the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, when the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1808.

  Next, the processes in steps S1804 to S1805 are the same as the processes in steps S8001 to S8002 described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not executed at the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, as a result, the presentation mode of the suggestive effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect executed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as the suggestion effect (passing pattern).

  In step S1806, when the prefetch effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any hold display is not displayed in a special manner on the combined hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggestion shown in FIG. The ratio of the effect (passing pattern) determination table is determined not to execute the suggesting effect (passing pattern) or to execute in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Further, when the prefetch effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special manner in the combined hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggested effect shown in FIG. 82 (B). It is determined that the suggestion effect (passage pattern) is not executed at the ratio of the (passage pattern) determination table, or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In addition, in the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table, determination values corresponding to the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, or “second effect mode”) are assigned. In the examples shown in A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect (passing pattern), and the determination items ("No effect", "No. 1 effect mode "or" 2nd effect mode ").

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a process table according to the effect mode and the variation pattern of the determined suggestion effect (passing pattern) (step S1807).

  Note that the processing in steps S1812 to S1815 is the same as the processing in steps S8005 to S8010 described in the first embodiment.

  When it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the prefetch effect restriction flag. If so, it is reset (step S1808). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, it is possible to restrict execution of a pre-reading effect during a period in which the hold display is displayed in a special manner, and a plurality of hold displays are special. It is possible to limit the display in a manner.

  Next, the processes in steps S1809 to S1810 are the same as the processes in steps S8001 to S8002 described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a display mode change process table according to the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total reserved memory counter for the effect, and the variation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, control goes to a step S1812.

  The process table for changing the display mode is to execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) at the start of the change of the effect symbol and the pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the specific hold display together with the change display of the effect symbol. It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of process tables for changing display modes are provided according to the suggestion effect (success pattern) to be executed and the aspect of the prefetch effect. Moreover, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation (success pattern) determined in the pre-reading presentation determination process (step S67110 or S67115) (in this example, the first production mode or the second production mode). And a pending display of the production target specified by the production total pending storage number counter (for example, when the value of the production total pending storage number counter is 2, the second pending display in the total pending storage display unit), Based on the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode) that is determined in the pre-reading effect determination process (step S67106) and stored in any way, the suggested effect (success pattern) Can be specified, and the pre-reading effect that changes which hold display to what display mode can be specified. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control has a plurality of types of display modes in accordance with the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total pending storage number counter for effect, and the variation pattern. The production mode determined in the pre-reading production determination process by selecting one of the process tables for the change time and executing the control of the production device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the selected process table for the display mode change. The pre-production effect can be executed by executing the suggestion effect (success pattern) and changing the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the notice target to the determined display mode.

  Next, a specific example of the prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the prefetch effect based on the first prefetch effect pattern in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83 (A), in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the two on-hold displays are displayed in the normal hold mode (“◯” in this example) on the combined hold storage display unit. When a start winning is performed while the game is being performed, a prefetch effect mode (prefetch effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and a suggestion mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. . In the example shown in FIG. 83, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the first pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is set at the time of starting winning (number of shifts 0) or shift. Number of times 1 is determined. In addition, the production mode of the suggestion production (success pattern) is determined as the first production mode or the second production mode.

  In this embodiment, in the prefetching effect based on the first prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (holding information) to be notified is not displayed once in the special mode, but the first display mode of the first display mode. It is displayed in a special mode or a second special mode. Moreover, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is a start winning timing or an arbitrary shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed in the hold storage display section in the first special mode (in this example, “x” is included in “◯”). Further, when the change timing is determined at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed in the hold storage display section in the second special mode (in this example, two “x” are included in “◯”).

  Even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not at the start winning timing (number of shifts 0) but at an arbitrary shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (B3), at the timing of the start winning prize, the third hold display is displayed in the normal hold mode (“◯” in this example) on the total hold storage display unit. Then, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 83C), and when the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted. The first and third hold displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which black arrows fly from the right side of the display area (FIG. 83 (D1)).

  If the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (E1), the second hold display (see FIG. 83 ( B3) A black arrow is inserted into the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) and a hold display with a black arrow is displayed in the first special mode ( In this example, “X” is included in “◯”). When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (E2), the second hold display (FIG. 83 (FIG. 83 In B3), an effect in which a black arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) in the first effect mode) is performed, and a hold display in which the black arrow is struck is a second special mode ( In this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”).

  In addition, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined as the second effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which white arrows fly from the right side of the display area (FIG. 83 (D2)).

  Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (E3), the second hold display (see FIG. In B3), an effect in which a white arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) in the second effect mode) is performed, and a hold display in which a white arrow is struck is the first special mode ( In this example, “X” is included in “◯”). If the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (E4), the second hold display (FIG. 83 ( B3) A white arrow is stabbed in the newly displayed hold display) (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) and a hold display with a white arrow is displayed in the second special mode ( In this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation (success pattern) is the second presentation mode, the display mode of the hold display is the first compared to the first presentation mode. It is configured such that the ratio of the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation of being a big hit than the one special mode is high. Therefore, when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when a black arrow is blown and stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation. high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 83 (D1) to FIG. 83 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is in the second effect mode, that is, when a white arrow is blown and stuck in the hold display, the ratio at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is obtained. high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 83 (D2) to FIG. 83 (E4) is high. By being configured in this way, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) that the arrow is flying and stuck in the hold display is made to feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, the suggestion effect is the first effect mode. When this is done, that is, when a black arrow flies, it is possible to feel that it is desired to pass without being stuck in the hold display (I want it to be a suggestion effect (passing pattern)).

  84 and 85 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of prefetching effects based on the second prefetching effect pattern in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84 (A), in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the two on-hold displays are displayed in the normal hold mode (“◯” in this example) on the combined hold storage display unit. When a start winning is performed while the game is being performed, a prefetch effect (prefetch effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and a suggestive mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the prefetch effect pattern is determined as the second prefetch effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is 1 shift number or 2 shift times. And decide. In addition, the suggestion effect mode is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (holding information) to be notified is displayed in a special manner at the start winning timing, and at any shift timing The final display mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. Therefore, when the prefetch effect pattern is determined to be the second prefetch effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the third hold display is displayed in a special mode (this In the example, six lines are drawn outside “◯”).

  Then, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 84C), and when the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted. The first and third hold displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow will fly from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as the suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display changes. (Second effect mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 84D).

  Here, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 84 (E1), the total pending storage display unit at the shift timing. While the second hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 84 (B3)) is effected (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, “x” is included in “◯”) and displayed. Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 84 (E2), at the shift timing, While the second hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 84 (B3)), an effect that a white arrow is stabbed (a suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed, The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”) and displayed.

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 84 (E3), the suggestion effect (second effect mode) in which a white arrow passes without sticking to any hold display at the shift timing. Suggestion production (passing pattern)). The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 84 (E3) is performed when it is determined in the effect symbol variation start process that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is executed in the second effect mode. Thus, in this embodiment, as the suggestion effect, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) flies from the right side of the display area. This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow is stuck in the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is performed), the display mode changes, and the arrow is stabbed in any hold display. If it passes without a suggestion effect (passage pattern), the display mode does not change.

  Thereafter, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 85 (F)), and when the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased. The first hold display is shifted. At this time, as the suggestive effect suggesting that the hold display changes, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) (FIG. 85 (G)). ).

  Then, when the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 85 (H1), at the shift timing, While the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 84 (B3)) is effected (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode), The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, “X” is included in “◯”) and displayed. Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 85 (H2), at the shift timing, While the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 84 (B3)) is performed, an effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed, The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “◯”) and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in this embodiment, in the prefetching effect based on the first prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (holding information) to be notified is not once displayed in a special mode. The final display mode is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the start winning timing. Also, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the prefetching effect based on the second prefetching effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (holding information) to be notified is displayed in a special manner at the timing of the start winning prize. The final display mode is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a plurality of timings, there are various timings for changing the display mode of the hold display. When the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Since the display is changed into two special modes, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is determined by determining the display result and the variation pattern of the variation display at the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning. Means. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 implements a hold display (total hold storage display) corresponding to the hold storage based on the determination result by the determination means, which is realized by executing a prefetch effect determination process, an effect symbol variation start process, and the like. There is an effect executing means for executing a pre-reading effect for displaying the storage in the storage in the first special mode or the second special mode. The effect execution means can display the hold display by changing it to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (start winning prize timing, shift timing, etc.). Is displayed, the variable display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started. Is configured to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the hold display by changing to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, and therefore there are various timings for changing the display mode of the hold display. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. it can.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display, which is realized by executing the pre-reading production determination process, the production symbol variation start process, or the like, is changed. Suggesting effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect (the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (passing pattern)) is provided. The suggestion effect executing means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect is executed at a high frequency, so that a sense of expectation can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is always displayed by changing from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. You may make it not change as it is. In this case, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold information) is started without the hold display being changed from the special form to the special form, compared to when the special display is changed to the special form. It is desirable to configure so that the ratio of winning big hits is low. By doing in this way, it can give more interest to the display mode of a hold display changing from a special mode to a special mode. In this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured so that the ratio of the display in the special mode is higher than the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state. It is desirable to do. By doing this, it is possible to give interest to the change in the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is possible to increase the expectation when the display mode is displayed in the special mode. . Conversely, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured so that the ratio of the display in the special mode is lower than that in the normal state. Also good. By doing in this way, it can make a player strongly desire that a display mode changes from a special mode.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state, when the variable display based on starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is being executed. You may comprise so that special production may be performed. Hereinafter, the special effect is executed when the variable display based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is executed when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state. The embodiment will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704) according to the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, in addition to the effect control command shown in the first embodiment from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100, when the game state is the high base state, A second start winning designation command at the time of high base indicating that a two start winning has occurred, and a second start winning designation command at the time of low base indicating that a second start winning has occurred when the gaming state is in the low base state, There is. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 86, in the command analysis processing shown in this embodiment, the processing when the second start winning designation command is received at the high base and the second starting winning designation command at the low base are received. Processing of processing is shown. Note that processes other than these processes in the command analysis process are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, instead of or in addition to the first reserved memory number addition designation command and the second reserved memory number addition designation command shown in the first embodiment, the command that can specify the reserved memory number is used. Then, a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting prize has been given and a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been the second start winning prize are used.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, when the received effect control command is the high base second start winning designation command (step S1601), the effect control CPU 101 stores the second start winning command storage area. In step S1602, “0” (indicating that the special effect is not executed) is set as the effect execution information.

  When the received effect control command is a low base second start winning designation command (step S1603), the effect control CPU 101 sets “1” (special) as effect execution information in the second start winning command storage area. Is set (step S1604). In addition, when there is presentation execution information for which “0” is set in the second start winning prize command storage area, the presentation control CPU 101 changes them to “1” (step S1605).

  In this embodiment, basically, the special effect is not executed when the variable display of the identification information based on the hold memory stored during the hit game in the high base state is performed, but the process of step S1605 is performed. By being executed, it is stored when a second start prize is generated in the winning game state when the holding memory stored when being controlled in the winning game state in the high base state is stored. The special effect is executed when the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the holding storage (holding storage stored when the hit gaming state is controlled in the high base state).

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 101, in the processing of steps S1602 and S1604, in the second start winning command storage area, the storage area where the variable category command was last stored (that is, the area where the latest received command is stored). The production execution information is set.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a start winning command storage area (first starting winning command storage area, second start winning command storage area) according to the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the start winning command storage area (first start winning command storage area, second start winning command storage area) is the same as that shown in the first embodiment. Instead of the first reserved memory number addition designation command and the second reserved memory number addition designation command, a first start prize designation command and a second start prize designation command are stored.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variable display of the identification information based on the hold memory stored in the hit gaming state (the transition is made when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the winning symbol) in the low base state is performed. Special effects are executed when As shown in FIG. 87, information indicating whether or not the special effect is to be executed (information indicating that the condition for executing the special effect is satisfied) is used as “effect execution information” in the start winning command storage area. Stored in

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are explanatory diagrams for explaining special effects in the fourth embodiment. 88A1 to 88D1 show examples in which special effects are executed, and FIGS. 88A2 to 88D2 show examples in which special effects are not executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 88A1 to 88D1, in the low base state, the second reserved memory increases (see FIGS. 88A1 and 88B1), and the variable display of the effect symbol based on the second reserved memory is performed. Is started, a special effect is executed (see FIGS. 88C1 and 88D1).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 (C1) and 88 (D1), the special effect is a special character image (not displayed when the special effect is not executed) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. (Cloud-like character image) 9j is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 88 (A2) to (D2), the second reserved memory is increased in the high base state (see FIGS. 88 (A2) and (B2)), but the effect design based on the second reserved memory is variable. Even when the display is started, the special effect is not executed (see FIGS. 88C2 and 88D2).

  In the example shown in FIG. 89, when the second start prize is generated in the low base state, and there is a holding memory based on the second start prize that has occurred in the high base state, the effect design started based on the start prize Special effects are executed during fluctuations. That is, an example is shown in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied for the second start winning that occurs in the high base state, the special effect is executed during the change of the effect symbol that is started based on the start winning.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 (step variation of the second special symbol is started) when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step 2). S8000A), it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set as effect execution information in the storage area (storage area 1) corresponding to the change to be started in the second start winning command storage area (step S8000B). If “1” is set, a special effect (see FIG. 88 (C1)) is started (step S8000C). And it transfers to the process after step S8001 shown in 1st Embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control microcomputer 100) is the identification information (based on the hold memory stored in the winning game state in the normal state (low base state)) ( The special effect is executed when the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol) is being performed, and the variable display of the identification information based on the hold memory stored in the winning game state is performed in the special game state (high base state) The special effect is not executed when the game ball is in the normal state, but when the reserved memory stored in the special game state and stored in the game state is stored in the hold memory means, 2. When passing the starting area, identification based on the hold memory (the hold memory stored in the special game state and the hit game state) stored in the hold memory means Since performing a special effect when the variable display of the broadcast is performed, it is possible to perform the frequency of the special effect is increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

  In the configuration shown in this embodiment, in particular, in the low base state, the open frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is not high compared to the high base state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is long (for example, If it is applied to a gaming machine that opens only for 1 second or 2 seconds in a high base state, while it is open for a long period of 5 seconds or 6 seconds in a low base state), a game by executing a special effect Can improve the interest of

Embodiment 5. FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, the abnormality information indicating that abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine can be displayed in the abnormality display area, and the abnormality display area is not covered by the movement of the movable member. You may make it comprise so that it may become. Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment is configured such that abnormality information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine can be displayed in the abnormality display area, and the abnormality display area is an area not covered by the movement of the movable member. A form is demonstrated.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine in addition to the processing shown in the first embodiment. An abnormality notification control process is executed.

  In this embodiment, a movable sub-image display device 51 is provided below the effect display device 9 (see FIGS. 92 and 93). The sub-image display device 51 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) that is smaller than the effect display device 9 and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub-image display device 51, an effect image associated with variable display on the effect display device 9 is displayed. In this embodiment, when the effect image is not displayed, the sub-image display device 51 is hidden behind the game board 6 and is in a position (second position) that does not cover the display area of the effect display device 9. When displaying the effect image, the sub-image display device 51 advances to a predetermined position (first position) on the front side (player side) of the display area of the effect display device 9. The sub-image display device 51 that has advanced to the first position covers a part of the display area of the effect display device 9 from the front side (player side). The effect display device 9 is also called a main liquid crystal, and the sub-image display device 51 is also called a sub liquid crystal. In order to display various effect images related to variable display in the main liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal, and the sub liquid crystal advances to the front side of the main liquid crystal, the sub liquid crystal is preferably provided in the vicinity of the main liquid crystal.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormality notification control process according to the fifth embodiment. The abnormality notification control process is a process for notifying an abnormality that has occurred by displaying an abnormality notification image, outputting an abnormality notification sound, or the like, and for terminating the notification of an abnormality that satisfies the notification end condition. In addition, priority is set for each type of abnormality, and abnormality notification is performed with priority given to abnormality with a high priority (particularly regarding abnormality notification sound). It is assumed that data for specifying the priority order is stored in the ROM in advance.

  In the abnormality notification control process shown in FIG. 91, the effect control CPU 101 performs an abnormality determination process (step S1701). The abnormality determination process is a process for determining the presence or absence of abnormalities (for example, abnormal winnings, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, full tank errors, ball breakage errors, door opening errors) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or abnormal termination. In the abnormality determination process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of abnormality or the presence or absence of abnormal termination based on, for example, a signal from an abnormality detection sensor group provided in the gaming machine. It is assumed that the abnormality occurrence condition and termination condition are predetermined for each abnormality type. If it is determined that there is an abnormality (an abnormality has occurred), the abnormality has been detected. If it is determined that there is an abnormal end, the abnormal end is detected. Note that the generation condition and the end condition may be changeable by an operation on a predetermined operation unit. In addition, when the abnormality detection designation command is transmitted from the main board 31, the effect control CPU 101 determines that an abnormality designated by the command has occurred. In addition, when the abnormal termination designation command is transmitted from the main board 31, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the abnormality designated by the command has been terminated (abnormal termination is present). It should be noted that for abnormalities in which abnormality notification is continued until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off or until a predetermined period elapses, the presence / absence of abnormal termination is not determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines whether a new abnormality has occurred after step S1701 (step S1702). For example, if there is an abnormality in which an effect side abnormality flag described later is off in the abnormality determined to have occurred in step S1701, the abnormality control CPU 101 is a new abnormality. Therefore, it is determined that a new abnormality has occurred (step S1702; Yes). At this time, the production-side abnormality flag corresponding to the new abnormality is turned on (step S1703). The production-side abnormality flag is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM so as to correspond to each type of abnormality. The production-side abnormality flag is turned on while the abnormality notification control corresponding to the flag is being performed, and is turned off when the notification control is not being performed. Multiple new abnormalities may occur. In addition, a new abnormality may occur before other abnormality notifications are completed. In these cases, a plurality of performance side abnormality flags are turned on.

  After step S <b> 1703, the effect control CPU 101 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109 of the effect control board 80, for example, to the abnormal display area in the display area of the effect display device 9. Control for displaying an abnormality notification image corresponding to the new abnormality (abnormality corresponding to the production-side abnormality flag turned on in step S1703) is started (step S1704). The abnormality notification image is an image for notifying the above-described new abnormality, and is an image according to the type of abnormality. The abnormality display area is set in advance according to the type of abnormality, for example. The abnormal display area overlaps with the sub-image display device 51 (see FIGS. 92 and 93) located at the first position in the display area of the effect display device 9 (the region in which the image can be displayed on the effect display device 9). It is provided in a region that is not covered (not covered). The abnormal display area is, for example, a relatively small area that does not interfere with the variable display of the effect symbol (FIG. 92, etc.), or a relatively large region that can be used instead of the variable display of the effect symbol (FIG. 93, etc. ). That is, the abnormality notification image is displayed larger or smaller depending on the type of abnormality. Note that the position of the small area described above (the position in the display area of the effect display device 9) varies depending on, for example, the type of abnormality. For this reason, the abnormality notification image is displayed at a different position depending on the type of abnormality. Each display position may be set in advance, for example. When the abnormality notification image is displayed large (when the abnormality display area is large), other images (including other abnormality notification images) are not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Here, when the abnormal display area is large, the abnormal display area is fixed. However, for example, the abnormal display area also has a different position depending on the type of abnormality as in the case where the abnormal display area is small. May be.

  The abnormality notification image is displayed so as to be superimposed on an effect image (for example, an image of a variable display effect or a demo image) displayed on the effect display device 9. For example, the abnormality notification image layer (layer having the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) is in front of the effect image layer (layer having the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) (player side). Both are displayed in a superimposed manner so as to be positioned at. For this reason, the control of the display of the effect image and the control of the display of the abnormality notification image are executed in parallel independently of whether the image is actually displayed. The layer of the abnormality notification image displayed in the small area described above makes the portion other than the abnormality notification image transparent (the display position of the abnormality notification image varies depending on the type of abnormality, so the shape of the transparent portion is abnormal It depends on the type.) Thereby, at least a part of the effect image can be visually recognized. Note that, for example, since the position of the small area described above varies depending on the type of abnormality, the position of the abnormal display area in the layer (the position of the abnormal display area in the display area of the effect display device 9) also depends on the type of abnormality. Different. The layer of the abnormality notification image displayed in the large area described above makes the portion other than the abnormality notification image opaque (for example, black). As a result, the effect image cannot be visually recognized.

  When the plurality of effect side abnormality flags are in the on state, control for displaying a plurality of abnormality notification images for the plurality of abnormalities is performed. In this case, when all of the plurality of abnormality notification images are displayed in the above-described small area, all of the plurality of abnormality notification images are actually displayed (the display position of the abnormality notification image depends on the type of abnormality). Because the shape of the transparent part varies depending on the type of abnormality). When a plurality of abnormality notification images include those displayed in the above-mentioned large area, only the abnormality notification images displayed in the large area (in the case of a plurality of cases, those with higher priority) are actually Is displayed. For example, a layer (a layer having the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) is created for each abnormality notification image, and each layer is displayed so as to be positioned in front so that the higher priority of abnormality is located. To. Thereby, the display of the abnormality notification image is controlled in parallel for all the abnormality notification images independently of whether the image is actually displayed, and the abnormality notification with a high priority is actually displayed with priority. Cheap. For this reason, depending on the priority of the new abnormality, the abnormality notification image may not actually be displayed even when the display control is started in step S1704. In this embodiment, the priority of abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described large area is higher than the priority of abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described small area. For this reason, the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described small area does not come in front of the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described large area. However, the priority order is arbitrary, and there are cases where the priority order of abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the large area is lower than the priority order of abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the small area. Also good. In this case, since the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-mentioned small area is in front of the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-mentioned large area, two or more in the large area and the small area. An abnormality notification image may be displayed. Further, as described later, when adopting a configuration in which a plurality of abnormality notification images are sequentially displayed in one layer, the highest priority among the plurality of abnormality notification images displayed in the one layer is other. It may be compared with the priority order of abnormalities in the layer.

  In addition, when only a plurality of abnormality notification images in which the production side abnormality flag is on are displayed in the small area, the abnormality notification images are not displayed and are all displayed (abnormal display). This is because the position of the region varies depending on the type of abnormality, and the display position of the abnormality notification image varies depending on the type of abnormality). Note that the position of the abnormal display area (the aforementioned small area) in the layer where the abnormal display image is displayed may be variable. For example, the layers for the plurality of abnormality notification images displayed in the small area are combined into one layer, and the plurality of abnormality notification images are sequentially displayed in one layer. In this case, a plurality of abnormality display areas are prepared in one layer, and priorities are set in the plurality of abnormality display areas, and among the plurality of abnormality notification images displayed in one layer, the highest priority is given. The abnormality notification image is displayed in the highest-order abnormality display area of the priority order, the next-order abnormality notification image is displayed in the abnormality display area of the next order, and the abnormality notification images of the respective ranks are displayed in the following order. You may make it display on an area | region. Specifically, for example, a plurality of abnormality display areas are arranged vertically (the upper one has a higher priority), and the abnormality notification image having the highest abnormality priority is displayed as the first abnormality from the top. In the display area, the abnormality notification image of the next order is displayed in the second abnormality display area from the top, and the abnormality notification image of the next order is displayed in the third abnormality display area from the top. In such a case, depending on the priority of abnormality of the newly displayed abnormality notification image, the display position of the already displayed abnormality notification image is moved by the start of display of the abnormality notification image. In addition, according to the display order of the plurality of abnormality notification images in one layer, a plurality of abnormality display areas (each corresponding to the display order is assumed. For example, the uppermost abnormality display area has the oldest abnormality notification displayed. In the image display area, the second abnormality display area from the top may display the plurality of abnormality notification images in the second oldest abnormality notification image display area (for example, in order from the top). In the case of simultaneous, the order is determined according to the priority order or at random). In addition, when fixing the display position of the abnormality notification image according to the type of abnormality, for example, one image (for example, a layer other than the abnormality notification image is displayed in a layer) when all abnormality notification images are displayed. (Transparent image) image data may be prepared, and the abnormality notification image may be displayed using this image data. For example, the abnormality notification image other than the abnormality notification image that is actually displayed in response to the abnormality that has occurred is made transparent on the image data image, so that only the abnormality notification image to be displayed is displayed. May be.

  Note that the display control of the abnormality notification image is continued until the notification end timing. For example, control is performed to continue displaying the abnormality notification image until there is an end command from the effect control CPU 101. Further, the display of the abnormality notification image may be continued by giving a display control command to the VDP 109 or the like every time the effect control CPU 101 executes the abnormality notification control process.

  After step S1704, among the abnormalities corresponding to the production-side abnormality flag in the on state, whether the priority of the new abnormality is the highest (if there are a plurality of new abnormalities, the abnormality with the highest priority is a plurality of new It is determined whether it is included in any abnormality (step S1705). In addition, when there is one production-side abnormality flag in the on state and the one flag corresponds to a new abnormality, the priority of the new abnormality is the highest.

  When the priority of the new abnormality is the highest (step S1705; Yes), operation control is started to start outputting the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality with the highest priority (step S1706). In step S <b> 1706, the production control CPU 101 performs control for outputting an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70 and the like. Let me start. When this control is performed, the effect control CPU 101 or the speech synthesis IC 703 of the sound control board 70 or the like generates effect sounds (such as output sounds and sound effects according to variable display effects, demonstration screen display, etc.). Control to set the volume to 0. As a result, although the sound output of the production sound is not performed, the reproduction of the production sound is continued in terms of control (that is, the control itself for outputting the production sound is continued). In addition, when the abnormality notification sound is output before the operation control, the operation control for the output abnormality notification sound is terminated. In addition, when there are a plurality of abnormalities, operation control is performed to reproduce the abnormality notification sound for each abnormality, but the volume of the abnormality notification sound for an abnormality whose priority is not the highest is set to 0 so that actual sound output is not performed. Also good. The output of the abnormality notification sound is continued until the output end timing. For example, the voice synthesizing IC 703 on the voice control board 70 continues to reproduce and output the abnormality notification sound until an end command is received from the effect control CPU 101. The output of the abnormality notification sound may be continued by giving a command to the speech synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70 or the like every time the effect control CPU 101 executes the abnormality notification control process.

  Note that notification of abnormality such as display of an abnormality notification image and output of abnormality notification sound may be performed for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the abnormality has ended. However, regarding the abnormality notification sound, when another abnormality having a high priority occurs in the middle, the output of the abnormality notification sound may end. Such an abnormality may be set in advance. Further, the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of abnormality. When the new abnormality described above is an abnormality that is notified only for the predetermined period, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined timer (provided in the RAM 122 with a timer initial value corresponding to the predetermined period corresponding to the abnormality). It shall be provided corresponding to each abnormality). Such setting is performed in step S1704, for example.

  After step S1706, when the priority of the new abnormality is not the highest (step S1705; No), when there is no new abnormality (step S1702; No), it is determined whether there is an abnormality that terminates the notification (step S1702). S1707).

  For example, when the notification is performed for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the abnormality has ended, the notification end timing is when the predetermined period has elapsed. Moreover, in the case of other abnormalities, for example, it is when it is determined that the abnormal end has occurred in the abnormality determination process. In step S1707, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the timer value (non-zero timer value) of the predetermined timer, and if the timer value after subtraction is 0, the abnormality control corresponding to the predetermined timer is detected. It determines with alerting | reporting being an end timing, and it determines with there being abnormality which complete | finishes alerting | reporting (step S1707; Yes). Further, when it is determined in step S1701 that the abnormality determination process has ended abnormally for an abnormality for which there is no corresponding timer and the production side abnormality flag is on, the production control CPU 101 notifies the abnormality. Is determined to be the end timing, and thereby, it is determined that there is an abnormality to end the notification (step S1707; Yes). In these cases (step S1707; Yes), the production-side abnormality flag corresponding to the type of abnormality that terminates the notification is turned off (step S1708). After that, for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP 109 of the effect control board 80 or the like, and the display of the abnormality notification image corresponding to the effect to end the notification is ended, and the abnormality notification image is displayed. (Step S1709). For example, the abnormality notification image is prevented from being displayed by deleting the layer. As described above, when the abnormality notification image is displayed on one layer, the abnormality notification image of each priority order is displayed in the abnormality display area of the corresponding priority order, or the abnormality notification image is displayed. When abnormality notification images are displayed in a plurality of abnormality display areas in accordance with the display order, the abnormality notification images are reduced in step S1709. Therefore, in step S1709, the display position of the abnormality notification image (any one of the abnormality display areas) is set. It may be controlled to display again according to these rules. When there are a plurality of abnormalities that terminate the notification, in steps S1708 and S1709, a plurality of flags are turned off, and the display of a plurality of abnormality notification images ends.

  After step S1709, it is determined whether or not an abnormal abnormality notification sound for ending the notification is actually output (step S1710), and if it is output, a command is issued to the speech synthesis IC 703 on the speech control board 70 or the like. The output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 by the output is terminated (step S1711). At this time, it is determined whether there is still a production-side abnormality flag in the on state. If there is a production-side abnormality flag in the on state, the abnormality having the highest priority among the abnormalities corresponding to the production-side abnormality flag. Operation control is started to start outputting an abnormality notification sound corresponding to (the abnormality corresponding to the flag when there is one production-side abnormality flag in the on state). For example, the production control CPU 101 starts outputting the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70. As described above, when the control is performed so that the actual sound output is not performed by setting the volume of the abnormality notification sound other than the abnormality notification sound for the abnormality having the highest priority to 0, the actual output is not performed this time. You may perform control which raises the volume of the abnormal alarm | sound to be started.

  After step S1711, when the abnormal abnormality notification sound for terminating the notification is not actually being reproduced and output at present (step S1710; No), when there is no abnormality for terminating the notification (step S1707; No), the abnormality notification control process Ends. Note that depending on the type of abnormality, either the display of the abnormality notification image or the output of the abnormality notification sound may not be performed in the notification of the abnormality. In this case, any of the processes of steps S1704 to S1706 and steps S1709 to S1711 may be omitted as appropriate.

  When an abnormality occurs through the above series of processing, an abnormality notification image for notifying the abnormality is displayed in the abnormality display area. Also, an abnormality notification sound for notifying abnormality is reproduced and output. Further, when a plurality of abnormalities occur, an abnormality notification image may be displayed for each of the plurality of abnormalities. As for the notification sound, only the abnormal notification sound with the highest priority is actually reproduced and output. Further, even during the abnormality notification, the execution of the variable display effect or the like is continued as it is (however, the effect sound is not output in practice, and the image may not actually be displayed).

  Next, an example of the effect image etc. in this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the figure, a thick line arrow in the display area of the effect display device 9 indicates that the effect symbol is variably displayed.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an effect image or the like when abnormality 1 and abnormality 2 occur as abnormalities in the fifth embodiment. For example, during the variable display of the effect symbol (FIG. 92 (A), the output sound is the effect sound), when an abnormality 1 occurs, an abnormality notification image ("occurrence of abnormality 1") that notifies that abnormality 1 has occurred. Is displayed in the abnormality display area (FIG. 92 (B), the output sound is abnormality notification sound of abnormality 1). Thereafter, when reach is established and the effect of super reach C is executed, the sub-image display device 51 moves to the first position, and the effect image (“super reach C !!”) is displayed on the sub-image display device 51. (FIG. 92 (C), the output sound is an abnormality notification sound of abnormality 1). Thereafter, when abnormality 2 occurs, an abnormality notification image (“abnormality 2 occurrence”) for notifying that abnormality 2 has occurred is displayed in the abnormality display area (FIG. 92D). After that, the output sound is replaced with the abnormality notification sound of abnormality 2. This is because abnormality 2 is higher in priority than abnormality 1. Thereafter, for example, when a predetermined period elapses, the notification of the abnormality 2 ends, and the abnormality notification image that notifies that the abnormality 2 has occurred is deleted (FIG. 92E), and the output sound is an abnormality of the abnormality 1. Return to the notification sound.) Thereafter, the variable display in which the super reach C is executed is finished, and the next variable display (next fluctuation) is executed (FIG. 92 (F), the output sound is an abnormality notification sound of abnormality 1). At this time, since the super reach C has been completed, the sub-image display device 51 has moved to the second position. After this, the notification of abnormality 2 ends, and the abnormality notification image that notifies that abnormality 2 has occurred is deleted.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an effect image or the like when an abnormality 5 occurs as an abnormality in the fifth embodiment. In abnormality 5, an effect image is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, blackout is performed in the display area, and an abnormality notification image of abnormality 5 is displayed. As described above, the manner of abnormality notification may be changed according to the type of abnormality. For example, during the variable display of the production symbol (FIG. 93 (A), the output sound is the production sound), when an abnormality 5 occurs along with the execution of Super Reach C, an abnormality notification image (notification that the abnormality 5 has occurred) “Abnormal 5 occurrence”) is displayed in the abnormality display area (FIG. 93 (B), the output sound is the abnormality notification sound of abnormality 5). At this time, the abnormality notification image is displayed larger than that at the time of occurrence of abnormality 1 or the like, the image of the variable display effect is not displayed, and the background is dark. However, the execution of the variable display effect or the like is continued in terms of control only when an image or the like is not actually displayed. Thereafter, for example, when a predetermined period elapses, the notification of the abnormality 5 ends, the abnormality notification image that notifies that the abnormality 5 has occurred is erased, and the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 is variably displayed. The image is returned to the medium effect image or the like (FIG. 93C, the output sound is also returned to the effect sound).

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the abnormality display area for displaying the abnormality notification image is provided in an area other than the weight area. The weight area is an area that overlaps the sub-image display device 51 in the display area of the effect display device 9, and specifically, an area covered by the sub-image display device 51 located at the first position, And a region covered by the sub-image display device 51 that moves between the first position and the second position (a route region serving as a route of the sub-image display device 51). That is, the abnormality notification image is displayed in a region other than these regions. Therefore, the abnormality notification image is not hidden by the sub-image display device 51 located at the first position or the sub-image display device 51 moving between the first position and the second position. Easy to see. Furthermore, since the abnormality display area for displaying the abnormality notification image is an area that is not covered by the holding member provided in the gaming machine, the abnormality notification image is not hidden by the holding member. Easy to see. Further, in this embodiment, even when the sub image display device 51 moves between the first position and the second position and an abnormality occurs and the abnormality notification image is displayed, The movement of the image display device 51 is not interrupted. Thereby, the control of the movement of the sub-image display device 51 can be simplified. In addition, when an abnormality is being notified, the variable display effect (the effect corresponding to the progress of the game, especially the variable display of the effect symbol) is not interrupted, so the variable display is smoothly variable after the abnormality notification ends. It is possible to return to a medium effect display (display without an abnormality notification image) or the like. Furthermore, by setting the abnormal display area to an area other than the area where the effect symbol is variably displayed (FIG. 92), the abnormality notification image is displayed so that the effect symbol can be visually recognized. It is possible to return to the display of the effect during the display. Also, the abnormality notification image may be made translucent. In this way, the entire image of the variable display effect can be visually recognized, and the display of the variable display effect can be smoothly restored after the abnormality notification ends. Further, in the above configuration, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, an abnormality notification image is displayed so that the plurality of abnormalities can be distinguished from each other, and the abnormality notification image is different from the effect display effect of the variable display effect. Since it is displayed at the position, it becomes possible to visually recognize an important part of the image of the variable display effect, and even when multiple types (here 2 types) of abnormalities occur at the same time, the multiple types of abnormalities Can be recognized individually and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. Furthermore, by making the abnormality notification image translucent, it becomes possible to visually recognize the entire variable display effect image, and it is easy to grasp the progress of the game. In addition, when a plurality of abnormalities occur, only the abnormality notification sound with the higher priority is output, so it is easy to hear the abnormality notification sound. Further, since the production sound is not output when the abnormality notification sound is output, it is easy to hear the abnormality notification sound. The abnormality notification image is displayed at least in a region that is not covered when the sub image display device 51 is located at the first position, so that the abnormality notification image can be displayed even if the sub image display device 51 located at the first position exists. It can be made easy to visually recognize.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, between the display device having the display area (the effect display device 9 in this example) and the first position and the second position different from the first position. And a movable member (in this example, the sub-image display device 51). In addition, an abnormality that has occurred in the gaming machine is detected, and abnormality information (in this example, an abnormality notification image) indicating that an abnormality has occurred is displayed in the abnormality display area of the display area in response to detecting the abnormality. Perform abnormal display control. The movable member covers at least a part of the display area from the player side when positioned at the first position, and the abnormal display area is an area not covered by the movable member positioned at the first position. Has been. Therefore, even if there is a movable member at the first position, it is possible to make the abnormal information easily visible.

  In this embodiment, the display area of the display device is the display area of the effect display device 9, and the same display area as that in which the hold display shown in the first embodiment is displayed is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, an abnormal display area may be provided in a display area provided separately from the display area in which the hold display is displayed, and may be covered by the movement of the movable member.

  Moreover, about the structure shown in said 2nd Embodiment-5th Embodiment, you may apply only any one structure to the game machine shown in 1st Embodiment, Any two or four configurations may be combined and applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment. Further, all the configurations shown in the second embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be combined and applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the variation control pattern 100 indicating the variation pattern such as the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the production control microcomputer 100. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 9a 1st reserved memory display part 9b 2nd reserved memory display part 13 1st starting prize port 14 2nd starting prize port 20 Special Variable winning ball equipment 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
On-hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as on-hold information;
A hold display control means for displaying a hold display corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the determination result of the determining means;
A determination unit that determines whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination unit;
Based on the determination by the determination unit, a display mode control unit that sets the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the determination as a special mode;
Continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous production in variable display multiple times;
A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes,
The continuous production execution means, when the display mode of the hold display is the special mode, executes the continuous production at a higher rate than when the display mode of the hold display is not the special mode,
The suggestion effect executing means compares the case where there is no hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode in the hold display. A game machine characterized by performing a suggestion effect at a high rate.